JP7204331B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player.

Such a game machine can perform a predetermined number of times a predetermined game such as a round game in which a variable winning means such as a special variable winning ball device is controlled from a closed state to an open state during a jackpot game state as an advantageous state. there was something In such a gaming machine, a specific display such as a count object capable of specifying the number of game media (game balls) that can win a prize until the variable winning means changes from an open state to a closed state during a predetermined game. (Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-108897 A (paragraph 0277 etc.)

However, in the above-described gaming machine, the specific display that can specify the number of game media that can be won during the round game as the predetermined game only has an effect of being erased each time the game media wins. There is a problem that the entertainment of the game is lacking and the interest of the game is not improved.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been devised in view of such a situation, and its object is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the performance of a predetermined game and improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of means A is a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for the player,
variable means capable of changing between a first state in which game media can enter and a second state in which game media cannot enter;
variable control means capable of executing a predetermined number of times a predetermined game for controlling the variable means from the second state to the first state in the advantageous state;
specific image display means capable of displaying a predetermined number of specific images for specifying the number of game media that can be entered from the time the variable means enters the first state to the time the second state is entered;
an obtainable number display means capable of displaying an obtainable number display capable of specifying the number of game media obtainable by entering the variable means in said advantageous state;
The specific image display means is
displaying the predetermined number of specific images when the variable means is in the first state, and maintaining display of the predetermined number of specific images until the variable means is in the second state;
When the predetermined number or less of game media enter the variable means, the display mode of one of the predetermined number of specific images already displayed each time a game medium enters is changed to the specific image. display by changing from to a specific mode in which a predetermined display accompanied by a predetermined action is displayed,
When the number of game media entering the variable means exceeds the predetermined number, all of the predetermined number of specific images changed to the specific mode are used to specify the specific image accompanied by a specific action. Execute a specific effect by activating the display, and then terminate the display of the predetermined number of specific images changed to the specific mode,
when the number of game media entering the variable means does not exceed the predetermined number, ending the display of the predetermined number of specific images changed to the specific mode without executing the specific effect;
The obtainable number display means does not change the obtainable number display when game media exceeding the predetermined number enter the variable means.
It is characterized by
Further, the gaming machine of means B includes setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of types of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player;
setting suggestion effect means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect for suggesting setting of the setting value;
The setting suggestion effect means, when the number of game media entering the variable means exceeds the predetermined number after the variable means enters the first state until the variable means enters the second state, It is characterized by being able to execute a setting suggestion effect.
Furthermore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the gaming machine of means 1 of the present invention is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player,
Variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can be changed between a first state (open state, etc.) in which game media can enter and a second state (closed state, etc.) in which game media cannot enter or is difficult to enter )When,
Variable winning control means (game control microcontroller) capable of executing a predetermined game (round game, etc.) for controlling the variable winning means from the second state to the first state in the advantageous state a predetermined number of times (15R or 5R, etc.) computer 100, S116, S117, etc. in FIG. 5);
The variable winning means displays a specific display (such as the winning display box image 271F003 in FIG. 10-1) capable of specifying a predetermined number of game media that can be won from the first state to the second state. With specific display means (production control CPU 120, S176 in FIG. 7, etc.),
When the variable prize-winning means is in the first state, the specific display means displays when the predetermined number of game media wins (FIG. 10-1(C), etc.) and when the game media greater than the predetermined number wins (Fig. 10-1 (D), etc.), the specific display is terminated in a different manner (when there is no over-win, as shown in Fig. 10-1 (C), all of the win display box images 271F003 After the images with the box lids opened and arranged side by side are displayed for a predetermined period of time, all the prize display box images 271F003 are erased, thereby ending the display of the prize display box images 271F003. As shown in FIG. 10-1(D), after all of the prize display box images 271F003 are displayed to be scattered due to the explosion, all the scattered prize display box images 271F003 are erased, and the prize display box images 271F003 are displayed. display is terminated, etc.).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of trouble due to being attached to the specific second mechanism.

According to such a configuration, since the variation of the effect related to the predetermined game is increased, the interest of the effect related to the predetermined game can be improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(2) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player,
Variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can be changed between a first state (open state, etc.) in which game media can enter and a second state (closed state, etc.) in which game media cannot enter or is difficult to enter )When,
Variable winning control means (game control microcontroller) capable of executing a predetermined game (round game, etc.) for controlling the variable winning means from the second state to the first state in the advantageous state a predetermined number of times (15R or 5R, etc.) computer 100, S116, S117, etc. in FIG. 5);
The variable winning means displays a specific display (such as the winning display box image 271F003 in FIG. 10-2) capable of specifying a predetermined number of game media that can be won from the first state to the second state. With specific display means (production control CPU 120, S176 in FIG. 7, etc.),
When the variable prize-winning means is in the first state, the specific display means displays when the predetermined number of game media wins (FIG. 10-2(C), etc.) 10-2 (D), etc.), the specific display is terminated (when there is no over winning, the winning display box image is displayed as shown in FIG. 10-1 (C) After executing the effect of displaying the image of the winning display box images 271F003 in which the lids of all the boxes of 271F003 are open and arranged side by side for a predetermined period, all the winning display box images 271F003 are erased. When there is an over-win, a predetermined character image 271F005 appears at the left end of the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 10-2(D). A character image 271F005 is displayed moving from the left side to the right side of the area, and during that movement, it collides with all of the prize display box images 271F003 one after another, and all of the prize display box images 271F003 are moved as indicated by the dashed arrows in the figure. After executing the effect of releasing the winning display box images 271F003 outside the display area, the display of the winning display box images 271F003 is ended by erasing all the released winning display box images 271F003, etc.).

According to such a configuration, since the variation of the effect related to the predetermined game is increased, the interest of the effect related to the predetermined game can be improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
Acquisable number display (the denominator of the number-of-balls image 271F002) that can specify the number of game media that can be acquired by winning the variable prize-winning means in the above-mentioned advantageous state (such as the number of wins that can be obtained for each type of jackpot) Obtainable number display means (such as production control CPU 120) that can display the obtainable number display etc.)
The obtainable number display means does not change the obtainable number display when game media more than the predetermined number are won (even if an over-win occurs, FIG. 10-1(C) and FIG. 10-2 are displayed). As shown in (C), the display of the number of possible wins indicated by the fractional denominator in the number-of-balls-out image 271F002 is fixedly displayed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, even if more than the predetermined number of game media wins, instead of not changing the display of the number of obtainable game media, when the predetermined number of game media wins and more than the predetermined number of game media wins, By ending the specific display in a different manner, or by ending the specific display after executing a different effect, the player is distrustful of the fact that the obtainable number display does not change. You can choose not to give.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The specific display means changes the display mode of the specific display based on the fact that the game medium has won a prize in the variable winning means. Each time a game ball wins a prize in the mouth, the winning display box image 271F003 is changed to a display mode in which the lid is opened and a star-shaped image 271F004 is released, etc.).

According to such a configuration, since there are many variations of the effects related to the predetermined game, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The specific display means has a different end mode of the specific display according to the number of times the game media win more than the predetermined number. Example], for example, the end mode of the display of the winning display box image 271F003 differs depending on the number of over winnings in each round, and the winning display box image 271F003 in the final round according to the total number of over winnings in all rounds. display end mode is different, etc.).

According to such a configuration, since there are many variations of the effects related to the predetermined game, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The advantageous state is an advantageous state selected from a plurality of types of advantageous states (15R jackpot, 5R jackpot, etc.),
The specific display means has a different display mode of the specific display according to the type of the advantageous state (as shown in FIG. image, and in the case of a 5R jackpot, select an image in the shape of a paper box, etc.).

According to such a configuration, since the display mode of the specific display is different according to the type of the big win, the variation of the effect related to the predetermined game is increased, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. FIG. 10 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like related to other characteristic portions; It is a rear view showing the pachinko gaming machine according to another characteristic portion. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command which concerns on another characteristic part. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers that are game random numbers related to other characteristic portions; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing variation patterns related to other characteristic portions; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table relating to another characteristic portion; It is an explanatory view showing a hit type determination table related to another characteristic portion. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit classification which concerns on another characteristic part. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table relating to another characteristic portion; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table relating to another characteristic portion; It is a figure which shows the data holding area for game control which concerns on another characteristic part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the arrangement of display monitors and the display contents related to other characteristic portions; It is a figure which shows the storage area which memorize|stores the number of prize balls which concerns on another characteristic part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a memory map related to another characteristic portion; It is a figure which shows the built-in RAM area based on another characteristic part. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of display control on a display monitor relating to another characteristic part; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an execution example of buffer update related to another characteristic part; 10 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing related to another characteristic portion; It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a back perspective view showing a pachinko game machine in a modification according to another characteristic portion. FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view showing a state in which the gaming machine frame is opened in a modified example relating to another characterizing portion; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a security cover in a modified example according to another feature; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a security cover in a modified example according to another feature; It is a figure which shows the example of state control based on another characteristic part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation control main process which concerns on another characteristic part. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on command processing relating to another characteristic part; FIG. It is a figure which shows the priority of the production|presentation control which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation control main process in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of ongoing setting confirmation processing in a modified example relating to another characteristic portion; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a configuration example of an output amount changeover switch related to the characteristic portion 71AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing initial setting control related to the characteristic portion 71AK; It is a figure which shows the example of execution of the alerting|reporting based on characteristic part 71AK. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display example related to a characteristic portion 71AK; It is a flow chart which shows an example of the production control main processing concerning feature part 71AK. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of a start output switching process related to the characteristic portion 71AK; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of an ongoing output change process related to the characterizing portion 71AK; FIG. It is a figure which shows the priority of production|presentation control in the modification which concerns on characteristic part 71AK. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an execution example of an initial motion related to a characterizing portion 72AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a control pattern related to a characteristic portion 72AK; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on command processing related to a characterizing portion 72AK; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on command processing in a modified example relating to a characteristic portion 72AK; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on command processing related to a characteristic portion 73AK; FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of a setting confirmation notification screen related to the characteristic portion 73AK; It is a figure which shows the structural example of the production|presentation control pattern which concerns on characteristic part 74AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the production control main processing concerning feature part 74AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the confirmation effect control process which concerns on characteristic part 74AK. It is a timing chart etc. which show the control example of the confirmation production|presentation based on characteristic part 74AK. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on command processing related to a characteristic portion 75AK; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of confirmation effect control processing during setting change concerning feature part 75AK. It is a timing chart etc. which show the control example of the confirmation production|presentation based on characteristic part 75AK. It is a figure which shows the production example of the special production|presentation based on the characteristic part 229F. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing in tabular form an interval period setting suggestion effect determination table relating to the characteristic part 229F. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process at the time of a big-hit start regarding the characteristic part 229F. It is a flowchart which shows the interval production|presentation setting process based on the characteristic part 229F. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing in tabular form an interval period setting suggestion effect determination table relating to the characteristic part 230F. FIG. 11 is a display screen view of the image display device 5 showing an example of an over winning setting suggesting effect related to the characteristic portion 231F; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing in tabular form an over winning setting suggestion effect determination table relating to the characteristic part 231F. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing related to a characteristic portion 231F; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the over winning a prize process based on the characteristic part 231F. FIG. 11 is a display screen view of the image display device 5 showing an example of an effect of suggesting setting of the number of acquisitions related to the characterizing portion 232F; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing in tabular form a winning number setting suggestion effect determination table related to the characteristic part 232F. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing acquisition number notification processing related to a characteristic part 232F; FIG. FIG. 11 is a display screen view of the image display device 5 showing an example of a V winning setting suggestion effect related to the characteristic portion 233F; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a V winning setting suggestion effect determination table related to the characteristic part 233F in tabular form. It is a flowchart which shows the V winning a prize alerting|reporting process based on the characteristic part 233F. It is a display screen view of the image display device showing a first effect example of the winning number specific display in the jackpot game state related to the characteristic portion 271F. It is a display screen diagram of the image display device showing a second effect example of the winning number specific display in the jackpot game state related to the characteristic portion 271F. It is a figure which shows a prize display box selection table classified by jackpot kind in tabular form.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area), the normal symbol display 2
0 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , random number circuit 10
4 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above functions of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed-up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the probability variable state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of a round in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the number of executions reaches the upper limit execution number. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit middle production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the small-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the small-hit game state based on the set contents. . Further, in the small-hit mid-performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the performance process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end performance. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is ended.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of Configuration Regarding Other Characteristic Portions)
Next, another characteristic part of the embodiment of the present invention will be described. This characteristic part enables execution of control of an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player based on the set value, and a configuration and setting for enabling the set value to be changed based on a predetermined setting change operation. It is provided with a configuration for making it possible to check the set values that are set by display. The set value can be displayed by a configuration capable of displaying information on game value such as a prize ball awarded based on the entry of a game medium such as a game ball into a predetermined area.

FIG. 8-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in the pachinko game machine 1 related to this feature. The same reference numerals are given to the configurations that are common to the above embodiment. For example, the output circuit 111 may have a configuration similar to that of the solenoid circuit 111 . The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may have the same configuration as the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The effect display device 5 may have the same configuration as the image display device 5 . When the display result is "miss" (hiragana), the display result is the same as when the display result is "miss" (katakana). The first general winning opening switch 26A, the second general winning opening switch 26B, the third general winning opening switch 26C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 26D are game balls that have passed through (entered) any of the plurality of general winning openings 10. is detected, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection.

Operation motors AK011 to AK014 that drive movable members that are movable accessories (movable production devices) and origin sensors AK021 to AK024 that detect the origin positions of the movable members are connected to the performance control board 12. . The operation motors AK011 to AK014 may be motors or electromagnetic solenoids. The origin sensors AK021 to AK024 may be configured using a contact type sensor such as a microswitch, or a non-contact type sensor such as a photosensor or a capacitive sensor. The performance control board 12 is provided with a real time clock (RTC) 126 capable of outputting time information.

In this embodiment (embodiment), when controlled to the small winning game state, a second big winning hole provided separately from the first big winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 The big winning opening is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the second big winning hole is opened during a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. state. In this embodiment, the second big winning opening is set to open once until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses in the small winning game state, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be opened multiple times in the small winning game state. When the solenoid 83 for the second large prize winning port is on, the second large prize winning port is opened by the second large prize winning port door, and the game ball passes through (enters) the second large prize winning port. easier. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 for the second large winning opening door is in the OFF state, the second large winning opening is closed by the second large winning opening door, and the game ball passes through the second large winning opening ( entry) to make it impossible. In this way, the second big winning hole changes between an open state in which game balls can easily pass (enter) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which game balls cannot pass (enter) and is disadvantageous to the player. In place of the closed state in which game balls cannot pass (enter) the second large prize-winning port, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which game balls are difficult to pass through (enter) the second large prize-winning port is provided. may

The count switch 23 serves as a first count switch for detecting game balls that have passed through (entered) the first big winning hole. A game ball passing through (entering) the second big winning hole is detected by the second counting switch by passing through the second counting switch installed in the second big winning hole. Based on the game balls being detected by the second count switch, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the second large winning hole that is in the open state, the game ball passes (enters) other normal winning holes such as the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole. More prize balls are paid out than when Therefore, when the second big winning hole is open, the game ball can enter the second big winning hole, and the first state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the second big winning hole is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult for the game ball to pass through (enter) the second big winning hole to obtain prize balls, which is disadvantageous to the player. 2 state.

A third count switch and a fourth count switch through which game balls can pass are installed inside the second big winning hole. A game ball that has passed (entered) the second big winning hole passes through either the third count switch or the fourth count switch and is guided to the back side of the game board 2 . The game ball is detected by the third count switch by passing through the third count switch. The game ball is detected by the fourth count switch by passing through the fourth count switch.

In this embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the third count switch during the small-hit game, the game state after the small-hit game ends is controlled to the big-hit game state. Therefore, when the course of the game ball is changed by applying vibration or the like during the period in which the second big prize opening door is open during the small winning game, and the game ball is detected by the third count switch, The pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment is designed to stop the game in such a case, since the game can be illegally controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player.

A regulating member that regulates and permits the game balls to flow down toward the third count switch is provided inside the second big winning hole. The regulating member is provided so as to be changeable between a regulating state for regulating the flow of game balls toward the third count switch and an allowable state for permitting the flow of game balls toward the third count switch. It is

In the small winning game state, when the game ball that has won the second big winning hole passes through the third count switch, it becomes a "big win" based on the passage of the game ball through the third count switch (V winning big win). That is, the CPU 103 controls the game state to the jackpot game state based on the passage of the game ball detected by the third count switch. On the other hand, when the game ball that has won the second big winning hole in the small winning game state passes through the fourth count switch, it does not become a "big win". That is, the CPU 103 does not control the game state to the jackpot game state based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the fourth count switch.

Then, when the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state based on the passage of the third count switch, the second big winning entrance door is opened for a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number ( For example, the second big winning hole is opened until 10 winning balls are generated. As a result, a round game is executed in which the second big winning hole is placed in the first state (open state) that is advantageous to the player. In this embodiment, when the big win game state is controlled based on the passage of the third count switch, the second big winning port is controlled to the first state. It is not limited, and the first big winning hole may be controlled to the first state.

The round game, which is the opening cycle of the second big prize hole, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, "15" or "5"). It should be noted that even before the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit number of times, even if the round game is terminated due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the game ball did not win the second big prize opening). good.

FIG. 8-2 is a rear view showing the main board 11, the performance control board 12, the power supply board 17, etc. mounted on the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 while being housed in a board case 201.例文帳に追加The main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 29 that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the display monitor 29 also has a function of displaying various types of prize winning information. A display changeover switch 300 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 29 , and information displayed on the display monitor 29 can be changed by operating the display changeover switch 300 .

The main board 11 includes a door opening sensor 90 for detecting the opening of the glass door frame that opens and closes the front surface of the game board 2, and a big winning opening for detecting the opening of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening. Various sensors such as the door sensor 91 are connected, and it also has a function of judging the occurrence of various abnormalities (errors) based on detection signals output from these sensors. A switch circuit 110 on the main board 11 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 .

The main substrate 11 is enclosed in a substrate case 201 made of a synthetic resin material having transparency. A display changeover switch 300 is arranged. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 300 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 3 is not opened, the front when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) includes each winning opening (first large winning opening, second large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, general winning opening, hereinafter referred to as "entering area ), and various types of winning information such as consecutive ratios and role ratios are displayed on the display monitor 29. These winning information are displayed. By doing so, it is possible to check various types of winning information such as consecutive ratios and role ratios after installation in the game arcade. On the side of the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 1, it is common to design the game board surface so that game balls enter the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (to pass the test). Also, when conducting the test, it is confirmed (verified) whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko game machine 1 is installed, whether or not adjustments have been made, what kind of adjustments have been made, and as a result of the adjustments, the game balls enter the general winning opening at the frequency as designed. is checked (verified). Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to recognize the presence or absence of adjustment after installation and the details thereof.

The power supply board 17 is configured to be able to supply power from an AC power supply (AC 100V), which is an external power supply (commercial power supply), to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. ing. The power supply board 17 is enclosed in a board case 201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and a lock switch 51 for switching between a setting change state and a setting confirmation state is provided on the upper right side of the back surface of the power supply board 17. A setting changeover switch 52 is provided which functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit (ball payout rate) in the changed state. In addition, the power board 17 is provided with a clear switch AK001 and a power switch AK002.

The lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the game machine frame 3 that can be opened by operating a predetermined key is opened. Only the person in charge who owns it can operate it. Further, since the lock switch 51 requires a key operation, it is possible to operate it only for those who have a key for operating the lock switch 51 among the staff members of the game arcade. The lock switch 51 is a switch that can be switched between ON and OFF with a predetermined key, and is also a switch that can perform an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a push operation).

When a power-on operation is performed using the power switch AK002, a predetermined operation using the lock switch 51 or the clear switch AK001, such as an ON/OFF switching operation of the lock switch 51 or an operation of pressing the clear switch AK001, is performed. may be The lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 may perform a predetermined operation using these switches at the same time when the power is turned on using the power switch AK002. Therefore, at least the lock switch 51, the clear switch AK001, and the power switch AK002 should be arranged at positions where they can be operated simultaneously by the staff of the game arcade or the like. In this way, the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 can detect various operations such as on/off switching operations and pressing operations by amusement arcade attendants, etc., following the operation of turning on the power using the power switch AK002. is configured to

A nozzle (ejection port) is provided at the lower part of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 for ejecting the game balls that have entered the respective winning apertures or the game balls that have entered the out aperture to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. is provided with a discharge port switch 70 for detecting a game ball discharged from inside the pachinko game machine 1 (detecting a game ball that has been shot). A signal from the outlet switch 70 is taken into the switch circuit 110 of the main board 11 .

FIG. 8-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that this command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

The command 8001H is a first variation start command that designates the start of variation in the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 4A. Command 8002H is a second variation start command that designates the start of variation in the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the effect display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating variable display results such as special symbols and performance symbols. In the variable display result notification command, the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "loss", "big hit", or "small hit", and when the variable display result is "big hit" Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which one of a plurality of types of jackpot types is to be set.

The variable display result notification command includes commands 8C00H to 8C05H, for example. The command 8C00H is a first variable display result specifying command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variation display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result that the variation display result is "big win" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A". The command 8C02H is a third variation display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result that the variation display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B". The command 8C03H is a fourth variation display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variation display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "small win A". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "small win B".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the effect display device 5 . The command 9000H is a RAM clear notification command for notifying that the storage contents of the RAM 102 are cleared due to the initialization in the game control microcomputer 100 when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on and power supply is started. is. The command 9100H is a setting change start command that designates the start of a setting change state in which setting values can be changed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts to supply power when the power is turned on. The command 9200H is a power failure recovery specification command that specifies execution of power failure recovery processing corresponding to power failure recovery. Command 93XXH is a setting change end command that designates the end of the setting change state.

In the setting change end command, for example, EXT data corresponding to the setting value newly set by the change may be set. In this case, different EXT data is set according to the set value newly set by the change in the setting change state or the set value continuously set without being changed. When the setting value consists of three levels from 1 to 3, the command 9300H specifies that the setting value is set to "1", and the command 9301H specifies that the setting value is set to "2". However, the command 9302H may specify that the set value is set to "3". Alternatively, only the command 9300H with EXT data of 00H may be prepared as the setting change end command, and the command 9300H may specify the end of the setting change state regardless of the setting value newly set by the change. Alternatively, a set value designation command for designating a set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be prepared as an effect control command different from the setting change end command. In addition to the case where the setting value designation command is transmitted along with the transmission of the setting change end command, for example, along with the transmission of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command, the fluctuation start and correspondence in each round of the special game may be sent as In addition, the set value designation command may be transmitted along with execution of the variable display of a predetermined number of times, such as every 10 times of variable start in the special game. Instead of or in addition to these, a setting value designation command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the winning start designation command or the winning end designation command. A set value designation command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the customer waiting demonstration designation command.

The command 9400H is a setting confirmation start command that designates the start of a setting confirmation state in which setting values can be confirmed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on and power supply is started. Command 9401H is a setting confirmation end command that designates the end of the setting confirmation state. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command for designating the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) occurrence has been determined on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing. The command 9F00H is a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating the display of a customer waiting demonstration screen (demonstration screen display) by displaying an effect image corresponding to the stoppage of the progress of the game in the customer waiting state.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open specification command that specifies a period in which the large winning opening is open in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening large winning opening designation command that specifies a period in which the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the performance image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning mouth and the notification command after opening the big winning mouth, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win game state or the small win game state (for example, "1" to "15"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is issued when a game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. Based on this, it is a second start winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command D100H is a V prize notification designation command for notifying that the game ball has passed the third count switch and the third count switch has been turned on, ie, that the V prize has been won. In the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control to execute a V winning notification effect for notifying that the player has won the V prize, based on the reception of the V winning notification designation command. In the V winning notification effect, different effect patterns may be determined according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1, or the decision ratio of a plurality of effect patterns may be varied. In this way, the setting value may be suggested by the effect mode of the V winning notification effect. For example, when the effect image showing "V" is rotated and displayed, the direction of rotation is clockwise and the direction of rotation is counterclockwise. may be Alternatively, a plurality of rendering modes in which the display color of the rendering image showing "V" is different may be included. Then, the set value designation command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the V prize notification designation command. As a result, when the V winning notification effect is executed, it is possible to appropriately determine the effect mode according to the set value.

FIG. 8-4 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying random numbers that are game random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, Numerical data indicating each of the random numbers MR4 and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. It should be noted that random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 .

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be varied according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 8-5 shows the variation pattern in this example. Hereinafter, the non-reach fluctuation pattern is also referred to as a non-reach fluctuation pattern, and the reach-loss fluctuation pattern is also referred to as a reach fluctuation pattern. In addition, a variation pattern in which the display result is a "big hit" is also called a big hit variation pattern, and a variation pattern in which the display result is a "small hit" is also called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach performance such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, . A variation pattern may be provided. Also, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ may be provided.

The ROM 101 stores, for example, a display result determination table (set value 1), a display result determination table (set value 2), a display result determination table (set value 3), a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), a big hit type determination A table (for the second special symbol), a small hit type determination table, etc. are stored.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big win or a small win (ball output rate) changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit and the small hit is changed. The setting value consists of three stages from 1 to 3, where 1 is the highest ball payout rate, and the higher the value is in the order of 1, 2, and 3, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 1 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the higher the value is in the order of 2 and 3, the lower the advantage is in stages.

FIG. 8-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. A hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set in the display result determination table. In the display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). In other words, for each case where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set.

FIG. 8-6(A) shows a display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1. FIG. When using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1, if the variable special designating buffer is the first, that is, if the first special design is subject to variable display, the set value is " 2" and "3", a higher probability (1/99) of winning the big win than in the case of "3", and part of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small wins. A small hit is won with a higher probability (1/50) than when the values are "2" and "3". When using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is the same as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and even when the second special symbol is subject to variable display, the same probability (1/99) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display. , and half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, so that the probability (100/200 ) to win a small prize.

FIG. 8-6B shows a display result determination table corresponding to setting value 2. FIG. When the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the probability (1/150) of the big hit is lower than when the setting value is "1". In addition to winning, part of these determination values are set as determination values corresponding to small wins, so that small wins are possible with a lower probability (1/99) than when the set value is ``1''. It is supposed to be elected. When using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is the same as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and even when the second special symbol is subject to variable display, the same probability (1/150) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display. , and half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, so that the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and , the small hit is won with the same probability (100/200) as when the set value is "1".

FIG. 8-6(C) shows a display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3. FIG. When using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is set, but the determination value corresponding to the small hit is If it is not set and therefore the first special symbol is subject to variable display, the probability of a big hit is lower (1/200) than when the set values are "1" and "2". You win, but you don't win a small win (probability of winning: 0). When using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is the same as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and even when the second special symbol is subject to variable display, the same probability (1/200) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display. , and half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, so that the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and , with the same probability (100/200) as when the set values are "1" and "2".

The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the big win, the special symbol wins (jackets A to It is determined to be a jackpot C). Also, when MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" indicates the probability (percentage) of a big hit and the probability (percentage) of a small hit. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also a matter of deciding whether or not to Determining whether or not to make a small win means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design. In this way, since the probability of being controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state differs depending on the set value, if the set value is changed, the setting value of 1 can be set in a plurality of settings with different degrees of advantage for the player. will be changed to another setting.

In this embodiment, in each display result determination table, the winning probability of the small hit in the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the second is all the same, but the set value 1, 2, 3 The winning probability may be lowered. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the winning probability of the small hit is made lower in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3, but it is the same as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second. Alternatively, the same winning probability may be set for all set values.

In this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table to determine whether a big win or a small win is to be made. Determination is performed using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the second special symbol, regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer, and the determination of the small hit is performed by: You may make it perform using a separate table by the case where a fluctuation special figure designation|designated buffer is the 1st, and the case where it is the 2nd.

In this embodiment, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the determination value other than the determination value corresponding to the big hit is used as the determination value corresponding to the small hit. It was not set, that is, the small hit was not won, but a part of the judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit was set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, so that the small hit was won. can be In other words, the fact that the ratio of the small-hit probability differs according to the set value includes that the small-hit probability is 0%.

In this embodiment, a total of three set values 1 to 3 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine 1 can be set to 2 or 4 or more (eg, 6). In addition, the player's advantage according to the set value is not limited to the fact that the smaller the set value, the higher the player's advantage, but the larger the set value, the higher the player's advantage. good too. For example, if the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, 1 is the lowest ball payout rate, and the higher the value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the ball payout rate is. The one with the highest payout rate may be used. In this way, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the lowest, and when 6 is set, the advantage for the player is the highest. The degree of advantage may increase in stages.

FIG. 8-7 is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table and a small hit type determination table. The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the hit type determination random number (MR2) when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot pattern. is referenced to determine In the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variation display result is a small win pattern, the type of the small win is set to a small hit A or a small win B based on the random number (MR2) for judging the type of the hit. is referenced to determine In this embodiment, when the game ball passes the third count switch during the small winning game of the small winning A, that is, when the V winning big winning occurs, the big winning game of the big winning D is executed. It's becoming Further, when the game ball passes the third count switch during the small winning game of the small winning B, that is, when the V winning big winning occurs, the big winning game of the big winning E is executed. . These big hits D and E are not the big hit types determined by the random number MR2 for judging the winning type extracted at the time of starting winning, but the game ball is placed in the second during any of the small wins A and B. It is a jackpot type determined by whether or not the 3-count switch is passed.

FIG. 8-7 (A) shows a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol). The jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). Referred when making a decision.

FIG. 8-7 (B) shows a big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol). The jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). Referred when making a decision.

FIG. 8-7 (C) shows a small hit type determination table. The small winning type determination table is referred to when determining the small winning type regardless of whether the game ball is a reserved memory based on which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening has won. .

FIG. 8-8 is an explanatory diagram showing the jackpot types in this embodiment. In this embodiment, as the types of jackpots, jackpot A and jackpot D are not executed after the jackpot game state is finished, and jackpot B, jackpot C and jackpot E are executed after the jackpot game state is finished. is set. Of these jackpots A to E, the jackpots C and E are the most advantageous jackpots for the player, and the jackpots A and D are the most disadvantageous jackpots for the player. Since the big win E is more advantageous than the big win D, the small win B is more advantageous than the small win A.

Out of these jackpots A to E, the jackpot A is a jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) of changing the first jackpot to a second state advantageous to the player are repeated. In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state of the jackpot A, the time saving control is not executed. The jackpot B is a jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the first jackpot to a second state advantageous to the player are repeated. Further, after the end of the big win game state of the big win B, the time saving control is executed until the special game is executed 20 times or until another big win occurs before the special game is executed 20 times. The jackpot C is a jackpot in which 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) of changing the first jackpot to a second state advantageous to the player are repeated. Further, after the end of the big win game state of the big win C, the time saving control is executed until the special game is executed 100 times or until the big win occurs again before the special game is executed 100 times. The jackpot D is a jackpot in which four rounds (so-called four rounds) are repeated to change the second jackpot to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state of the jackpot D, the time saving control is not executed. The jackpot E is a jackpot in which 14 rounds (so-called 14 rounds) are repeated to change the second jackpot to a second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big win game state of the big win E, the time saving control is executed until the special game is executed 100 times or until another big win occurs before the special game is executed 100 times.

Although the jackpot D and the jackpot E are opened as the second jackpot, the present invention is not limited to this. , may be the first big prize opening. That is, for the small winning game, the second large winning opening is opened, and for the big winning D and the big winning E based on the occurrence of the V winning during the small winning game, the first big winning opening is replaced with the second large winning opening as the big winning game. All you have to do is open the big prize mouth.

In the time-saving state, the probability of becoming a "normal hit" increases, making it easier for a small hit to occur than in the normal state. Therefore, in the time-saving state, there are cases where a big hit occurs as a result of the variation display of the second special symbol, and there are cases where a game ball wins V during a small win game, so a big win occurs, so the big win game state is normal. It becomes easy to occur continuously without going through the state, and it becomes a so-called consecutive chan state.

In the time-saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot B, the number of special games in which the time-saving control is executed is set to 20 times, so a small hit occurs during the 20th special game, and the game ball is placed in the second. The rate of passing through the 3-count switch (the rate at which a game ball wins V during 20 special games and a big hit occurs) is set to about 50%. On the other hand, in the time saving state after the big win C and the big win E are finished, the number of special games in which the time saving control is executed is set to 100 times, so a small win occurs during the 100 special games. , the rate at which the game ball passes through the third count switch (the rate at which the game ball wins V during 100 special games and a big hit occurs) is set to approximately 100%.

In this embodiment, five types of jackpots A to E are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and six or more jackpot types may be provided. A type or less may be provided.

In the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the setting value is "1", 0 to 49 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit A, and 50 149 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 149 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 150 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining the big win B or the big win C for which the time saving control is executed at the end of the big win game is lower in the order of the set value 1, 2, 3. I'm trying to be

In the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is "1", 0 to 29 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit A, and 30 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 69 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 70 to 269 are assigned to the jackpot B, 270 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 199 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the big win A, and 200 to 269 are assigned to the big win B, 270 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Thus, when a big hit occurs in the special game with the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the big wins B and C for which the time saving control is executed at the end of the big win game is the big hit in the special game with the first special symbol. is higher than in the case of occurrence of .

In this embodiment, when the set value is 1, the percentage of determining the jackpot type as the jackpot C is the highest, followed by the percentage of determining the jackpot B and the percentage of determining the jackpot A. The lowest (jackpot type determination ratio at set value 1: jackpot C>jackpot B>jackpot A). Also, when the set value is 2, the percentage of determining the jackpot type to be the jackpot B is the highest, followed by the percentage of determining the jackpot A is high, and the percentage of determining the jackpot C is the lowest (set value 2 jackpot type determination ratio: jackpot B>jackpot A>jackpot C). Furthermore, when the set value is 3, the percentage of determining the jackpot type as the jackpot A is the highest, followed by the percentage of determining the jackpot B and the percentage of determining the jackpot C being the lowest. (jackpot type determination ratio at set value 3: jackpot A>jackpot B>jackpot C).

It should be noted that there may be one or a plurality of undetermined jackpot types among the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C depending on the set value. In other words, if the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs according to the set value, it is possible to not determine one of the jackpot types (the determination ratio is 0%), or to set a specific jackpot type to 100%. Determining percentages is included.

In the small hit type determination table, when the setting value is "1", 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the small hit A, and 100 to 299 are small It is assigned to hit B. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 149 are assigned to the small hit A, and 150 to 299 are assigned to the small hit B in the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. there is Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 199 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the small hit A, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the small hit B. there is In this way, when the V winning big hit occurs during the small winning game, the number of times of the special game in which the time saving control is executed after the big winning game is finished is 1.
The ratio of determining the big win E of 00 times is higher than the percentage of determining the big win D of 20 times, and the setting values 1, 2, and 3 are lower in order.

In this embodiment, when the set value is 1, the small win B is determined as the small win type at a higher rate than the small win A, thereby generating a V prize during the small win game. The ratio of determining the jackpot type to be the jackpot E is higher than the ratio of determining the jackpot type to be the jackpot D (the ratio of determining the jackpot type by V winning at the set value 1: jackpot E>jackpot D). Further, when the set value is 2, the small win A and the small win B are determined at the same ratio as the small win types, so that a V prize is generated during the small win game. The percentage of the jackpot type determined to be the jackpot D and the percentage of the jackpot type determined to be the jackpot E are equal based on (the ratio of the jackpot type determination by the V prize at the set value 2: jackpot E=jackpot D). Further, when the set value is 3, the small win A is determined as the small win type at a higher rate than the small win B, thereby generating a V prize during the small win game. Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to be the jackpot D is higher than the ratio of determining the jackpot type to be the jackpot E (the ratio of determining the jackpot type by V winning at the set value 1: jackpot D>jackpot E).

As described above, in this embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a big hit and the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the V winning occurs are different according to the set value. That is, the kind of the small winning game state controlled according to the set value may change, and the kind of the big winning game state controlled when the V winning occurs may change. It is designed to improve amusement interest.

In addition, depending on the setting value that is set, among the small hit A and the small hit B, there may be a small hit type that is not determined. That is, the determination ratio of the small hit type is different according to the set value that is set, one of the small hit types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%), that is, the other small hit It also includes determining the type at a rate of 100%. Further, the determination ratio of the small hit type may differ depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. When the small hit type is determined at a different rate according to the fluctuation special figure, depending on the fluctuation special figure, there may be a small hit type that is not determined among the small hit A and the small hit B. In other words, to determine the small hit type at a different rate according to the fluctuation special figure, do not determine one of the small hit types (determination rate is 0%), that is, the other small hit type Determining at a rate of 100% is also included. At least one of the big hit type and the small hit type may be determined using MR1, which is a random number value for special figure display result determination. It may be arranged such that the larger the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The determination ratios of the big win types and the small win types are not limited to different ones according to the set values, and the big win types and the small win types may be determined by the same determination ratio for all the set values.

Regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the game property itself is not limited to change, and the game property may change according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the jackpot game ends when the game ball passes the third count switch during the jackpot game. The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a game property (so-called V probability variable type) in which the ratio of the game balls passing through the third count switch during the big win game is different while controlling the subsequent game state to the probability variable state. is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game ball passes through the third count switch during high base (during time reduction control). Based on that, it may be a game property (so-called one type and two types mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state. Furthermore, although the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are 1 to 3 and the game performance is the same, the probability of a big hit or the probability of a small hit is higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. , a setting may be provided in which the number of winning balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 or 4, the third count switch is used as an effect switch (a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the third count switch), When the set value is 2 or 3, the third count switch is used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the third count switch). may be used.

The ROM 101 stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern determination table is used to determine one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns according to the pre-determined result. As the variation pattern determination table, a variation pattern determination table for big hits used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is a "big hit", and a variation display result as a "small hit" is determined in advance. A big-hit variation pattern determination table used when the game is won and a loss variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result will be "loss" are prepared in advance.

FIG. 8-9 is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit variation pattern determination table and a small hit variation pattern determination table. The big-hit variation pattern determination table is referred to determine a variation pattern based on the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination when it is determined that the variation display result is a big-hit pattern. The small winning variation pattern determination table is referred to determine a variation pattern based on the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern when it is determined that the variation display result is to be a small winning symbol.

FIG. 8-9 (A) shows a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A). The big-hit variation pattern determination table (for big-hit A) is referred to when the big-hit type is big-hit A. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), when the set value is "1", 0 to 300 out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 is the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1 ), 301 to 800 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 801 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). ing. Also, if the set value is "2", 0 to 350 out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 351 to 825 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 826 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the setting value is "3", 0 to 400 out of the range of 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 401 to 850 are assigned. It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

FIG. 8-9(B) shows a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win B and big win C). The big-hit variation pattern determination table (for big-hit B, big-hit C) is referred to when the big-hit type is big-hit B or big-hit C. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), if the set value is "1", 0 to 100 out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 is the normal reach jackpot variation pattern ( PB1-1), 101 to 350 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). assigned to. Also, if the set value is "2", 0 to 150 out of the MR3 judgment value range of 0 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 151 to 450 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 451 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the setting value is "3", 0 to 200 out of the range of 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 201 to 550 are assigned. It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

The variation pattern determination table for the jackpot (for jackpot A) and the variation pattern determination table for the jackpot (for jackpot B, jackpot C) include the variation pattern for the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the variation pattern for the super reach α jackpot (PB1- 2) For each variation pattern of the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take is assigned as a judgment value. When the jackpot A is won in the special game, the rate of determining the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is higher than the rate of determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot, Moreover, the set values 1, 2, and 3 are designed to decrease in this order. In addition, when the jackpot B or jackpot C is won in the special game, the ratio for determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot determines the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot. It is higher than the ratio and lower in the order of setting values 1, 2, and 3. In this embodiment, when the type of jackpot is "jackpot B" or "jackpot C", super reach β is likely to be determined, and when the jackpot type is "jackpot A", super reach α is determined. By assigning the determination value so as to facilitate the game, the player's expectation that the variation pattern of the super reach β will be executed is enhanced as a ``jackpot B'' or a ``jackpot C''. can do

FIG. 8-9 (C) shows a small hit variation pattern determination table. In the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the set value is "1", "2", or "3", 0 to 997 out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 is a small hit is assigned to the variation pattern (PC1-1). In the small hit variation pattern determination table, for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random value out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value. It is In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in this embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as a small hit variation pattern, The small hit variation pattern may be determined at different ratios from a plurality of variation patterns with set values "1", "2", and "3".

FIG. 8-10 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation pattern determination table. The losing variation pattern determination table is referred to determine the variation pattern based on the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern when it is determined that the variation display pattern is to be the losing pattern.

FIG. 8-10(A) shows the deviation pattern determination table A. FIG. The variation pattern determination table A for loss is referred to when the number of pending memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not performed. In the variation pattern determination table for loss A, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super A predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a judgment value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the reach β deviation.

FIG. 8-10(B) shows the deviation pattern determination table B. FIG. Loss variation pattern determination table B is referred to when the total number of pending memories is 2 to 4 in the low base state. In the variation pattern determination table for loss B, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4 (PA1-2), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super reach α A predetermined random value within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the variation pattern (PA2-2) of the deviation and the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β deviation is assigned as a judgment value. there is

FIG. 8-10(C) shows the deviation pattern determination table C. FIG. Loss variation pattern determination table C is referred to when the total number of pending memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state. In the losing variation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach losing variation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 5 to 8, the normal reach losing variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α A predetermined random value within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the variation pattern (PA2-2) of the deviation and the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β deviation is assigned as a judgment value. there is

FIG. 8-10(D) shows the deviation pattern determination table D. FIG. Loss variation pattern determination table D is referred to when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is being implemented. In the variation pattern determination table for deviation D, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach deviation corresponding to the time reduction control (PA1-4), the variation pattern of normal reach deviation (PA2-1), the variation pattern of deviation of super reach α (PA2 -2), a predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) that is out of super reach β.

When using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern or the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the determination of the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the set values 1, 2, 3 Lower in order It is designed to be Also, when using the variation pattern determination table A to D for deviation, 701 to 900 of the determination values are super reach α deviation variation patterns, and 901 to 997 are super reach β deviation, regardless of the variation pattern determination table. Each is assigned to a variation pattern, that is, if the variation display result is a failure, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the set value, so the variation pattern of super reach It is possible to prevent the performance effect from deteriorating due to the non-execution of the variable display by .

Note that the "common decision ratio" means that the decision ratio is completely the same with different setting values (this embodiment), and that the decision ratio is the same with different setting values (for example, the setting value Between 1 and set value 3, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of super reach differs by about 1%). If the variable display result is a failure, regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of the super reach variation pattern is not limited to the same form, and if the variable display result is a failure, Regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, and only the determination ratio of the variation pattern of either non-reach or normal reach is They may be identical. If the fluctuation display result is a loss, regardless of the set value, both the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β are set to the set value Regardless, it is not limited to the same form, and if the variation display result is a loss, only one of the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β is lost , may be the same regardless of the set value. If the fluctuation display result is a loss, regardless of the set value, both the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β are set to the set value However, it is not limited to the same form, and even if the variation display result is a big hit, the set value in which the determination ratio of the super reach big hit variation pattern is set regardless of the set value may be the same regardless of If the fluctuation display result is out of range, depending on the set value, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of non-reach and normal reach is not limited to a different form, and depending on the set value, non- There may be one or more undetermined variation patterns among the reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern. The fact that the determination ratio of the variation pattern differs according to the set value is that none of the variation patterns is determined (the determination ratio is 0%), or that a specific variation pattern is set at a rate of 100% It also includes determining It is not limited to the form of determining a variation pattern using a different variation pattern determination table for loss according to the total number of pending memories, but the number of pending memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, the variation display of the first special symbol When executing, the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol, and the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol when performing the variable display of the second special symbol) Variation pattern using a different variation pattern determination table for loss may be determined.

In each loss variation pattern determination table, even if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any numerical value of 1 to 3, the super reach loss variation pattern (PA2-2 and PA2-3) The range of assigned random numbers is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the probability of losing differ depending on the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the variation display is actually executed in the variation pattern of losing the super reach (the probability of losing the super reach) Appearance rate of variation pattern) is different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In addition, according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the variation display is not limited to a form in which the rate of execution in the variation pattern of super reach is different, and the jackpot probability for each setting value and Considering the loss probability, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variation display may be executed in the super reach loss variation pattern at the same rate.

8-11 shows the game control data holding area 150. FIG. The game control data holding area 150 is provided in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 and serves as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . The game control data holding area 150 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, a normal figure reservation storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game control timer setting unit. 153 , a game control counter setting section 154 and a game control buffer setting section 155 .

151 A of 1st special figure reservation storage parts memorize|store the reservation data regarding the variable display of the 1st special figure in the 1st special design indicator 4A. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition by passing (entering) the game ball Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the result of the variation display, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like by the CPU 103 based on establishment are held data. , until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The first starting condition is established when a game ball passes (enters) a first starting winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting winning occurs. The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended without being started yet, and the fluctuation display result in this special figure game (Special figure display result) It becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or not.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 151B stores the reservation data relating to the variable display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition by passing (entering) the game ball Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the result of the variation display, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like by the CPU 103 based on establishment are held data. , until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The second starting condition is established when a game ball passes (enters) a second starting winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting winning occurs. The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended without being started yet, and the fluctuation display result in this special figure game (Special figure display result) It becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or not.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern reservation storage unit 151C stores the reservation information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.例文帳に追加For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags. The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software. The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data representing each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The display of the tally of game balls, the ratio of the role items, etc. on the main board 11 of the present embodiment will be described. On the main board 11, there is information about the winning of the game, for example, the number of winning balls in the first starting winning opening (navel), the number of winning balls in the second starting winning opening (electric chew), The number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls obtained by winning the prize hole and the second big prize hole (attacker) are input, the number of shot balls is counted, and the display monitor 29 displays the first big prize hole and the total number of prize balls. Consecutive ratio (%), which is the percentage of the number of prize balls won in the second big prize gate (attacker), the number of prize balls in the second start prize gate (electric chew) out of the total number of prize balls Role ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of winning balls in the 1st and 2nd big winning openings (attacker), Base (%), which is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls launched is displayed. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of consecutive winning balls described below) to the total number of prize balls won in the first and second big prize openings (attackers). The role ratio is the number of prize balls from the 2nd starting prize mouth (electric chew) and the number of prize balls from the 1st and 2nd grand prize mouths (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls ( It is the ratio occupied by the number of balls acquired below). The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls (total number of balls won below) is based on the number of prize balls won in the 1st and 2nd big prize gates (attacker) and the number of prize balls won in the 2nd start prize gate (denchu). The number of prize balls and the number of prize balls won in prize openings other than the 1st and 2nd major prize openings (attacker) and 2nd starter prize openings (denchu) (1st starter prize opening, general prize opening) It is the sum of the number and In addition, the first big prize hole, the second big prize hole (attacker), and the second start prize hole (electric chew) are variable accessories, and the width of the game ball that can pass through changes, so that the game ball wins a prize. It is a role that the assumed ratio fluctuates. In addition, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the first big winning opening, second big winning opening (attacker), and second starting winning opening (electric chew) are fixed accessories, The passable width of the ball is fixed, and the assumed winning ratio of the game ball is a fixed accessory.

As a method of counting and calculating information related to game winnings, regarding the consecutive ratio and the role ratio, the prize balls by winning the first start prize hole (navel) and the general prize hole (sode) in the number of 6000 prize balls number (general number of prize balls), number of normal electric prize balls (number of electric chew prize balls) that is the number of prize balls entered into the second starting prize hole (electric chew), first big prize hole and second big prize The number of special electric prize balls (attacker's prize balls), which is the number of prize balls awarded to the mouth (attacker), is counted. The total is regarded as one set, and the consecutive ratio (%) and role ratio (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60,000 pieces are calculated. In addition, the number of prize balls (number of general prize balls), the number of normal electric prize balls (number of electric chew prize balls), the number of special electric The number of prize balls (attacker's prize balls) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, which has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets and is updated for each set. ing. In other words, a considerable amount (for example, several bytes) of 11 sets of 6000 pieces is stored, and the cumulative consecutive ratio (%) and role ratio (%) can be calculated. As for the base, the number of game balls hit with respect to the number of 60,000 prize balls is counted. The tally is regarded as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60,000 prize balls to the number of game balls hit is calculated.

The display monitor 29 displays the consecutive ratio (%), the role ratio (%) for 6000 balls, the cumulative consecutive ratio (%), the role ratio (%), and the base ( Base 1 (%)), Base calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls (Base 2 (%)) for a predetermined time (
For example, the display can be switched every 5 seconds. That is, six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to display everything, but as the game progresses, the number of winning balls by winning the first start winning opening (navel) and the number of winning balls to the second starting winning opening (electric chew) The number of prize balls due to winning, the number of prize balls due to winning in the first big prize opening and the second big prize opening (attacker) will change. Then, for example, if the number of prize balls won after 6000 consecutive ratios (%) are displayed is reflected in the 60000 consecutive ratios (%) displayed after that, 6000 consecutive ratios (%) will be displayed. There is a possibility that a discrepancy may occur between the consecutive ratio (%) and the role ratio (%) for 60000 pieces. Therefore, the number of prize balls by winning the first start prize mouth (navel), the number of prize balls by winning the second start prize mouth (electric chew), the first big prize mouth and the second big prize mouth (attacker) If the number of winning balls and the total number of winning balls are input, and the tally is performed at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, the timing of displaying the consecutive ratio (%) for 6000 balls), such discrepancies can be avoided. can be prevented.

In this embodiment, the storage area for storing the information about the winning of the game is provided for each set value, and the general winning ball, the first starter winning ball, the normal electric winning ball, and the special electric winning ball are provided. The balls, the total number of prize balls, and the total number of hits are stored in a storage area (ring buffer) according to the set values. Therefore, the continuous ratio, role ratio, and base in this embodiment can be calculated individually for each set value.

As an example of the calculation method below, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls from winning the 2nd starting prize mouth (Denchu) and the number of prize balls to the 1st and 2nd grand prize mouths (attacker) A method of calculating the role ratio (role ratio (%)) when the number of winning balls is 42000, which is the sum of the number of winning balls in (1). In the following description, the total number of acquired balls refers to the total accumulated number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Also, the number of winning balls refers to the total number of game media paid out as a result of the winning of game media by the attacker and the electric chew. Also, the number of consecutive winning balls refers to the total number of game media paid out by winning game media to the attacker. The total hit means the total number of game media hit into the pachinko game machine 1 until the number of prize balls reaches 60,000. Therefore, the continuous ratio can be calculated by the following formula (1). Also, the role ratio can be obtained by the following formula (2). Also, the base can be obtained by the following formula (3).

Consecutive ratio = [number of balls acquired in succession / total number acquired] x 100 (1)

Role ratio = [(number of balls acquired in a row + number of balls acquired in a row) / total number acquired] x 100 (2)

Base = [60000 (total number of prize balls) / total hit] x 100 (3)

When the total number of prize balls is 60,000 and the number of winning ball is 42,000, the role ratio is obtained by dividing 42,000 by 60,000 to obtain 0.70 (rounded down to three decimal places). However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko game machine 1 cannot perform calculations below the decimal point, the following method of calculation is required.

First, the first calculation method will be explained. In the first calculation method, first, the number of winning balls is multiplied by 100 to be 4,200,000. Then divide this 4200000 by 60000. This gives a quotient of 70. From 70 obtained here, the character ratio is obtained as 70%. In other words, by multiplying the dividend by 100, the calculation result can be obtained up to two digits below the decimal point. Here, to obtain the calculation result up to three digits below the decimal point, it is necessary to multiply by 1000.

Next, the second calculation method will be explained. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is 10
Divide by 0 to get 600. Then divide 42000 by this 600. This gives a quotient of 70. From 70 obtained here, the character ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result can be obtained up to two digits below the decimal point. Here, division by 1000 is sufficient to obtain a calculation result up to three digits below the decimal point.

In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60000, but a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the role product ratio for a long period of time. That is, in this example, it is stored as 00EA60h in a 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A410h is stored in the 3-byte storage area for the number of winning balls. The microcomputer used in the pachinko game machine 1 can only perform calculations between values of maximum 2 bytes. Therefore, the lower 1 byte may be truncated for ease of calculation.

A third calculation method, which is a simplified version of the second calculation method, will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate calculation in the microcomputer used in the pachinko game machine 1, 60h of the lower 1 byte is discarded from the total number of prize balls 00EA60h, and the total number of prize balls is reduced to 00EAh. Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, 10h of the lower 1 byte is truncated from 00A410h of the number of winning balls to calculate the number of winning balls as 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation. Then, as in the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls by 100 (273/100). 156 is then divided by 2 to obtain 78 as the quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the role product ratio is obtained as 78%. In the third calculation method, while the microcomputer used in the pachinko game machine 1 can easily perform calculations, an error of +12% occurs. However, the error is +1% when both the total number of prize balls and the number of winning balls are 10 times. In other words, as the period for calculating the role-product ratio becomes longer, the error is reduced and approximates the original value.

Assuming that the total number of winning balls is 34,321 and the number of winning balls is 19,876, the role ratio (%) is calculated by dividing 19,876 by 34,321 as a divisor. 19876/34321=0.57912 . When performing calculations in the game control microcomputer 100, calculations with decimal points must be avoided, so the following formulas are substituted. In the division of 19876/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, and the decimal point is discarded, resulting in 19876/343=57.9475. Since the decimal point is rounded down, a role ratio (%) of 57% is calculated and displayed on the display monitor 29. In this example, the value calculated by accurate calculation is an error on the display. There will be no

The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (0 for values other than the most significant bit), and the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of acquired balls are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799=100%, and when replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327=100.3%, which is an error of +0.3%. When the calculation is performed by truncating the decimal point, for example, if the correct value is 69.9% and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, the display is 1 at 69% → 70%. Although it is conceivable that an error of 1% is displayed, the role ratio (%) (or the consecutive ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error even on the display of 1% error.

Also, when using the above calculation method, the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100, so if the total number of acquired balls is less than 100, the calculation cannot be performed. Furthermore, when it is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10000, the error exceeds 1% and may become even larger. In other words, the smaller the total number of acquired balls, the larger the error. For this reason, the total number of acquired balls above a certain number (for example, 32768, which is the minimum value of 16 bits)
) are counted by a counter, the role ratio (%) and the consecutive ratio (%) may not be displayed on the display monitor, or even if they are displayed, there is a possibility that the error may be large. Alternatively, the value may be notified by outputting a notification sound or blinking the displayed value.

The storage area for storing the information regarding the winning of the game may continue to be stored without being initialized when the clear switch AK001 or the like is operated. This storage area includes a ring buffer, and may constitute a 10-set total buffer or a prize ball total number buffer that totals the information related to the winning of the game stored in the ring buffer provided with 10 counters of maximum 2 bytes. . In addition, the checksum of the stored value is calculated, and initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected. Initialization of the memory area that stores information about the winning of the game, such as when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the number of consecutive winning balls is greater than the number of winning balls processing may be performed. Also, the error display or warning display may be performed without performing the initialization process, or the initialization process may be performed while performing the error display or warning display or after performing the initialization process.

If there is a problem with the calculation of the consecutive ratio or role ratio, etc., and you are forced to redo the calculation of the consecutive ratio or role ratio, operate the switch for clearing the display monitor, which is different from the clear switch AK001. By doing so, data used for continuous ratios and role ratios stored in a non-volatile storage device such as RAM 102 or flash memory may be cleared. The switch for clearing the display monitor may be arranged at a position such as a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 on the back side of the game board 2, where it cannot be easily operated by a game hall attendant or the like. When the display monitor clear switch is operated, a display monitor clear signal different from the clear signal is transmitted to the main board 11 .

The substrate case 201 is made of a translucent material so that the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 29 can be viewed. The substrate case 201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main substrate 11 is inserted, and a heat radiation hole for releasing heat from the electrical components of the main substrate 11 . The display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat radiation hole is not directly in front. Therefore, the visibility of the display monitor 29 is not obstructed by the heat dissipation holes. Here, the term “right front” means a straight front with the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means a space between the main board 11 and a game hall attendant or the like who tries to visually recognize the main board 11 .

The display monitor 29 displays the role ratio (%), the continuous ratio (%), and the base (%) on 7 segments, and each value is switched and displayed every predetermined period (for example, every 5 seconds). do. In this case, for example, while the role ratio (%) is displayed for 5 seconds, an event occurs in which a new game medium wins an electric chew or an attacker. %), there is a risk that the value of the role ratio (%) and the value of the consecutive role (%) will deviate. Therefore, it is preferable that the role ratio (%) and the consecutive ratio (%) are calculated in the same interrupt and the calculated values are displayed sequentially. If the numerical value that can be displayed in the 7 segments is two digits (for example, if two 7 segments are provided), 100% cannot be displayed as 100%. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. The display monitor 29 can display numeric values in the lower two digits, but even in this case, the numeric values may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, under certain conditions, a numerical value may be displayed in part of the upper two digits. In addition, it is not limited to the form in which the sensor provided for each of the attacker and the electronic chew detects that the game medium has won a prize, and the number of prize balls for each is individually tallied based on the detection result. Using a sensor provided after the discharge passage for discharging the winning game media and the electric chew for discharging the winning game media merges, based on the detection results, the number of winning balls and the number of consecutive winning balls. may be aggregated.

The main board 11 is provided on the back side of the game board 2 . On the back side of the game board 2, in addition to the main board 11, peripheral boards such as an effect control board 12 are also provided. The RAM 102 on the main substrate 11 stores a gate passing number counter, a first start winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, a fourth A general winning number counter and a big winning number counter are provided. The number of prizes won in the first and second major prize openings (attacker) is not limited to the form in which the number of prizes won is tallied by the number counter of the number of prizes won, and the number of prizes won in these first major prize openings is counted. A first big prize winning counter and a second big winning prize counter for tallying the number of winnings to the second big winning hole are separately provided, and the number of winning to the first big winning hole and the number of winning to the second big winning hole The number of winnings and the number of winnings may be counted individually, and these respective numbers of winnings may be totaled to be the number of winnings for the attacker.

The gate passing number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21 . The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start opening switch 22A. The second starting winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the second starting opening switch 22B. The first general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch 26A. The second general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning opening switch 26B. The third general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 26C. The fourth general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 26D. The large winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23 and the second count switch 24A.

8-12 show the layout and display contents of the display monitor 29. FIG. The main board 11 is housed in a board case 201 . A caulking pin 11B is attached to the board case 201 . By providing the caulking pin 11B, the main board 11 is completely enclosed in the board case 201, thereby preventing tampering with the main board 11. FIG. The board case 201 is a crimped board case (hereinafter also referred to as “crimped board case”). A display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11 . A seal 11S is attached to the board case 201 to prove that the main board 11 is enclosed. The sealing seal 11S is pasted over, for example, the detachable portion of the substrate case 201. As shown in FIG. The sealing seal 11S is arranged at a position away from the main substrate 11, and is arranged at a position different from a position where the visibility of the display monitor 29 is obstructed, such as directly in front of the display monitor 29. Thus, the display monitor 29 is arranged at a position not hidden by the sealing seal 11S.

As shown in FIG. 8-12(A), the display monitor 29 includes a first display section 29A, a second display section 29B, a third display section 29C, a fourth display section 29D and a fifth display section 29E. . Each of the first display portion 29A to the fifth display portion 29E is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display section 29A to fifth display section 29E are capable of lighting and blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. In addition, it is possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

As shown in FIG. 8-12(B), the display monitor 29 displays each item of display Nos. 1 to 6. FIG. The first display portion 29A of the first digit displays the aggregated setting values (1 to 3), and the second display portion 29B of the second digit and the third display portion 29C of the third digit display the aggregation period. A numerical value is displayed in percentage in the fourth display portion 29D of the fourth digit and the fifth display portion 29E of the fifth digit. Display No. 1 displays a short-term continuous ratio, and display No. 2 displays a short-term role ratio. In display No. 3, the total cumulative consecutive ratio is displayed, and in display No. 4, the total cumulative role ratio is displayed. Also, display No.
In display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls is displayed, and in display No. 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls is displayed. The short term here means a period during which the number of awarded balls (the number of won balls) was 6000. The period for calculating the total sum means the total period from when the calculation of the continuous ratio and the role ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the role ratio is once reset. In the above example, the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base are calculated regardless of the game state, but they may be calculated in consideration of the game state. For example, the consecutive ratio may be the ratio of the total number of prize balls accounted for by the number of prize balls entered into the big prize opening during the jackpot game state. In addition, the role ratio is defined as the ratio of the number of prize balls entered into the second starting prize opening during the high base state and the number of prize balls awarded into the large prize opening during the jackpot game state out of the total number of prize balls. good too. Also, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term consecutive ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." is displayed on the second display portion 29B and the third display portion 29C. "y7." is displayed on the display section 29B and the third display section 29C. When the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the fourth display section 29D and the fifth display section 29E, and the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the short-term role ratio is displayed in percentage (%) on the fourth display section 29D and the fifth display section 29E. When the total cumulative winning ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." is displayed on the second display portion 29B and the third display portion 29C, "A7." is displayed on the second display portion 29B and the third display portion 29C. When the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the fourth display section 29D and the fifth display section 29E, and the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. When displayed, the total cumulative winning ratio is displayed as a percentage (percentage display) on the fourth display section 29D and the fifth display section 29E. When Base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, "bL." is displayed on the second display portion 29B and the third display portion 29C. "B6." is displayed on 29B and the third display portion 29C. When base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) in the fourth display section 29D and the fifth display section 29E, and base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed. , the total cumulative winning ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the fourth display portion 29D and the fifth display portion 29E.

When calculating the consecutive ratio, the role ratio, and the base, the main board 11 includes the first and second major winning openings (attacker), the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening. The number of game balls entering the fourth general prize winning opening and the number of game balls discharged from the discharge opening are totaled. In the main process, the CPU 103 controls the gate switch 21, the first starting switch 22A, the second starting switch 22B, the first count switch 23, the second count switch 24A, and the first general winning opening switch 26A to the fourth general winning opening switch 26A. Switch processing is performed to confirm the state of each switch (presence or absence of a detection signal) of the prize winning port switch 26D and the discharge port switch 70. FIG. In the switch process, it is specified which entry area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. When the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passing number counter is added, and when the detection signal is output from the first start switch 22A and the second start switch 22B, The values of the first starting winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter are added, and when a detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the value of the big winning number counter is added, and the first general winning opening switch 26A is added. , second general winning slot switch 26B, third general winning slot switch 26C, and fourth general winning slot switch 26D, when detection signals are output, the first general winning slot counter, the second general winning slot counter, the By adding the values of the 3 general winning number counter and the 4th general winning number counter, and when a detection signal is output from the discharge port switch 70, adding the value of the hitting number counter, The number of game balls entering (the number of game balls entering each winning hole) is totaled. Note that the values of each counter are stored in the RAM 102 . In this way, the step for tallying the number of game balls entering each entry area is executed together with a series of processes for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (switch state confirmation processing). By including it in the switch processing), the number of game balls entering each entry area can be tallied without executing a separate tallying program, that is, without causing the problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in the number of programs to be executed. It has become.

FIG. 8-13 shows a storage area for storing the number of prize balls to each winning hole. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of winning balls into each winning hole based on the tallied number of winning balls into each winning hole, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning hole. Let The number of winning game balls is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out for one winning to a winning opening by the number of winning times to the winning opening. The number of winning game balls is determined in advance for each winning opening. The number of prize balls for each classified prize hole is as follows: general prize ball (1st general prize ball to 4th general prize ball (sode)), 1st start prize ball (4th general prize ball) 1 Prize balls for winning the starting prize mouth (navel)), normal electric prize balls (balls for winning electric chews), special electric prize balls (balls for winning attackers) be. The RAM 102 also stores the total number of prize balls and the number of game balls hit. Note that the CPU 103 individually counts the number of game balls winning the general winning opening and the number of game balls winning the first start winning opening, but the number of the game balls winning the general winning opening and the first start winning opening The number of winning game balls into the winning opening may be totaled together. In addition, although the number of general prize balls and the number of first start prize balls are calculated separately, the number of general prize balls and the number of first start prize balls are calculated separately. The number of prize balls and the number of prize balls may be calculated together.

The RAM 102 has a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of prize balls and the number of hits. The ring buffer has 10 first to tenth storage areas each consisting of a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of winning balls in each winning hole for every 6000 winning balls. Thus, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). In addition, the active buffer has a 0th storage area consisting of a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of winning balls in each winning hole for every 6000 winning balls. In the 0th storage area, the number of winning balls for each winning hole, which increases as the game progresses, is added. The 11 storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256×256=65536 data, and can store up to 6000 data with a margin. In addition, the RAM 102 is provided with storage areas for the number of prize balls (10 sets) stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area, the sum of the number of hits, and the total cumulative total for each winning hole. there is The 10 sets of total sum and total cumulative total storage area consist of a maximum 3-byte counter. I can remember.

The RAM 102 stores a continuous ratio/role ratio storage area for storing the 10 sets and total cumulative ratios and continuous ratios, a base (base 2) for 10 sets, and a base (base 1) for the previous 10 sets. A base storage area is provided for The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the role ratio and the consecutive ratio for the 10 sets and the total cumulative number of winning balls based on the winning number of the game balls into each winning opening for the 10 sets and the total cumulative total. and stored in a continuous ratio/role ratio storage area for storing the total cumulative ratio and continuous ratio. The continuous ratio/role ratio storage area for storing the 10 sets and the cumulative total ratio and continuous ratio is composed of a maximum 1-byte counter. If the role ratios and consecutive ratios for 10 sets and the total total are stored as integers, for example, a maximum 1-byte counter can be stored with a margin. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the base for 10 sets based on the number of winnings of game balls into each winning opening for 10 sets, and calculates the base for 10 sets (base 2) and the previous time. A base (base 1) calculated based on the number of hits of game balls into each winning hole for 10 sets (base 1) is stored in the base storage area. If base 1 and base 2 are stored as integers, for example, a maximum 1-byte counter can be stored with a margin.

8-14 shows a memory map of the CPU 103 on the main board 11. FIG. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing internal registers, ROM 101, RAM 102, and the like. The address/data signal lines of the ROM 101 are assigned to a built-in ROM area which is a ROM area of the memory space (0000H to 2FBFH of 0000H to 2FFFH in this embodiment, and 2FC0H to 2FFFH are program management areas). Data is read from the ROM 101 by designating this ROM area. In addition, in this embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas from the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area starts from 0000H. The address/data signal lines of the built-in registers are assigned to the built-in register area (FE00H to FEBFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the built-in registers and transfers data to the registers via this built-in register area. data is written. The address/data signal lines of the RAM 102 are assigned to the built-in RAM area, which is the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space. Data is written to the RAM 102 . Other areas of the memory space (3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, and FEC0H to FFFFH in this embodiment) are unused areas.

FIG. 8-15 shows the RWM area which becomes the internal RAM area. A built-in RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 is composed of a RAM control area, a non-use area, a RAM data area and other areas. The storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area consists of instruction data (opcodes) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction. Data for the control program to be executed (sometimes simply referred to as control program data) is temporarily stored. A storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area temporarily stores reference data (for example, various lottery data) referenced by the control program.

Data used to display the continuous ratio and the role ratio are temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area or the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area is provided with a storage area for storing the total number of prize balls for each winning hole and a storage area for the consecutive ratio role ratio of the total total. The storage areas of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas include an active buffer with the 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer with the 1st to 10th storage areas, and the number of prize balls for each winning opening (for 10 sets). ) and a continuous ratio storage area for 10 sets are provided. Note that the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area store data with different start addresses of subroutines. 1-byte (8-bit) data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address in the built-in RAM area, and each data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data, management data) takes up 1 byte. If the data exceeds the number of bytes (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided into 1-byte units and stored in storage areas of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of continuous addresses in the RAM control area. .

8-16 show examples of display control on the display monitor 29. FIG. The main board 11 controls the display monitor 29 to display the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base. A plurality of items are sequentially displayed on the display monitor 29 .

FIG. 8-16A is a time chart showing how the display on the display monitor 29 changes. When the display on the display monitor 29 is started, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed first. The short-term continuous ratio display No. 1 is displayed in green. When the display of display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term role ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. Display No. 3 of the total cumulative ratio is displayed in red. When the display of display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative role ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the display No. 4 total cumulative winning ratio is displayed in red. When display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed. The display of base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed in red. When display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed. The display of base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed in red. Then, when the display of display No. 6 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. Thereafter, each display is sequentially changed every 5 seconds from the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 to the base 2 of display No. 6. As for the color of the display, only the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 to the base 2 of display No. 5 are red. In this manner, the display monitor 29 switches and displays the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, base 1, and base 2 every five seconds.

FIG. 8-16 (B-1) shows a case where the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display portion 29A, the character "y" is displayed on the second display portion 29B, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display portion 29C. Is displayed. Short-term continuous ratios are displayed on the fourth display section 29D and the fifth display section 29E. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display portion 29D, and the character "1." is displayed on the fifth display portion 29E.

FIG. 8-16 (B-2) shows a case where the short-term role ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display portion 29A, the character "y" is displayed on the second display portion 29B, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display portion 29C. Is displayed. Short-term role ratios are displayed on the fourth display section 29D and the fifth display section 29E. For example, when the short-term role ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display section 29D, and the character "3." is displayed on the fifth display section 29E.

FIG. 8-16 (B-3) shows a case where the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display section 29A, the character "A" is displayed on the second display section 29B, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display section 29C. Is displayed. Further, the total running ratio is displayed on the fourth display portion 29D and the fifth display portion 29E. For example, when the total cumulative consecutive ratio is 58%, the character "5." is displayed on the fourth display portion 29D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display portion 29E.

FIG. 8-16 (B-4) shows a case where the total cumulative winning ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display portion 29A, the character "A" is displayed on the second display portion 29B, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display portion 29C. Is displayed. Further, the total cumulative winning ratio is displayed on the fourth display portion 29D and the fifth display portion 29E. For example, when the total cumulative role ratio is 68%, the character "6." is displayed on the fourth display portion 29D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display portion 29E.

FIG. 8-16 (B-5) shows a case where base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display portion 29A, the character "b" is displayed on the second display portion 29B, and the character "L." is displayed on the third display portion 29C. Is displayed. Also, the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display portion 29D and the fifth display portion 29E. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display portion 29D, and the character "0." is displayed on the fifth display portion 29E.

FIG. 8-16 (B-6) shows a case where base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display portion 29A, the character "b" is displayed on the second display portion 29B, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display portion 29C. Is displayed. Also, the base 2 calculated based on the last 60,000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display portion 29D and the fifth display portion 29E. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display portion 29D, and the character "2" is displayed on the fifth display portion 29E.

The display of the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1, and base 2 can be sequentially changed for each set value based on the operation of the display changeover switch 300. there is For example, when the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term consecutive ratio, total accumulated consecutive ratio, total accumulated consecutive ratio, base 1, base 2 are displayed when the set value is "1", the display changeover switch 300 is operated. As a result, the numerical value displayed on the first display portion 29A is updated to "2", and the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term role ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio displayed on the fourth display portion 29D and the fifth display portion 29E, The display of the total cumulative role ratio, base 1, and base 2 is changed to display corresponding to the case where the set value is "2". When the short-term success ratio, short-term success ratio, total cumulative success ratio, total cumulative success ratio, base 1, and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "2", by operating the display changeover switch 300, The numerical value displayed on the first display section 29A is updated to "3", and the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning combination ratio, total cumulative continuous ratio, and total cumulative total are displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. The display of the role ratio, base 1, and base 2 is changed to display corresponding to the case where the set value is "3". When the short-term success ratio, short-term success ratio, total cumulative success ratio, total cumulative success ratio, base 1, and base 2 are being displayed when the set value is "3", by operating the display changeover switch 300, The numerical value displayed on the first display portion 29A is updated to "1", and the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term consecutive ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, and the total cumulative total are displayed on the fourth display portion 29D and the fifth display portion 29E. The display of the role ratio, base 1, and base 2 is changed to display corresponding to the case where the set value is "1".

Note that the display monitor 29 is not limited to a form that can display the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base at each set value. Only any two numerical values may be displayable. The continuous ratio, role ratio, and base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, are calculated, and the display monitor 29 displays these continuous ratio, role ratio, and base. Instead of calculating the role ratio and the base, the display monitor 29 may display the history of the number of awarded balls. On the display monitor 29, only the short-term consecutive ratio is displayed in red, and the short-term consecutive ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, base 1, and base 2 are not limited to being displayed in green. The short-term ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative ratio are displayed in the same color, and for Base 1 and Base 2, the same May be displayed in color.

Figures 8-17 show example execution of updates in the active and ring buffers. In the main board 11, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches a predetermined capacity of 6000, the storage in the 0th to 10th storage areas in the ring buffer is updated. Furthermore, the storage area for the total sum and the total total for 10 sets, and the storage area for the continuous ratio/role ratio storage area for storing the role ratios and continuous ratios for the 10 sets and the total total are updated. At this time, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer, and the numerical values stored in the first to ninth storage areas of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area. It is moved from the storage area to the 10th storage area. For example, the numbers of general prize balls in the 0th to 9th storage areas are ``27'', ``81'', ``120'', ``36'', ``225'', ``87'', ``66'', ``117'', and ``45''. It is "21". At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th memory area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls in the 1st memory area to the 10th memory area is changed to "27", "81" and "120" respectively. ''36''225''87''66''117''45''21'. Along with this, the number of prize balls in the 0th storage area is set to "0" and the number of prize balls in the 10th storage area is deleted. When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area, the number of prize balls stored may be erased once and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new number of prize balls may be stored by overwriting the stored number of prize balls.

(Explanation of game control regarding other characteristic parts)
FIG. 8-18 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing executed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 in this embodiment. This main process may be executed instead of the game control main process. In the main process, CPU 103 first disables interrupts (step Sa1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step Sa2), and the stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step Sa3). After initialization of built-in devices (initialization of built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits) CTC (counter/timer) and PIO (parallel input/output port), etc.) (step Sa4), RAM 102 is accessible. (step Sa5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of a specific register (I register) built in the CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

Subsequently, based on the clear signal output from the clear switch AK001, it is determined whether the clear switch AK001 is on (step Sa6). If the clear switch AK001 is off, it is determined whether or not the power failure detection process has been executed (step Sa7). If the power failure detection process has been executed, it is determined whether or not the execution result of the parity check is normal (step Sa8). If the check result is normal, the head address of the setting table at the time of backup is set in the pointer (step Sa41), and the initial value is set in the work area based on the content (step Sa42). As a result, the stored contents regarding the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the time of the power failure are restored.

When the power failure is restored in step Sa42, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 51 is on based on the lock switch signal, which is the output signal of the lock switch 51 (step AKS001). If the lock switch 51 is ON in step AKS001, the setting value can be confirmed by executing the setting confirmation process (step AKS002). In the setting confirmation process, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . If the lock switch AK002 is off at step AKS001 or after the setting confirmation process is executed at step AKS002, the process proceeds to step Sa14. In addition, when the lock switch AK002 is off in step AKS001, the command 9200H serving as a power failure recovery designation command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the execution of the setting confirmation process is started in step AKS002, it becomes a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the setting confirmation is started from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A command 9400H as a command is transmitted. When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting game balls by operating the hitting ball operation handle 30, detecting game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal The symbol display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop display of the winning symbols or the like, or display corresponding to the game stop state different from the losing symbols. When the execution of the setting confirmation process in step AKS001 is completed, the setting confirmation state and the accompanying game stop state are terminated, and a command 9401H serving as a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. be done.

If the clear switch AK001 is ON in step Sa6, if the power failure detection process is not executed in step Sa7, or if the check result is not normal in step Sa8, a predetermined RAM clear is performed. Processing is executed to clear data other than the set values stored in the backup storage area of RAM 102 (step Sa9). The storage area in which the information regarding the winning of the game is stored may not be cleared in step Sa9. Following step Sa9, the head address of the setting table at initialization is set in the pointer (step Sa10), and the initial value is set in the work area based on the content (step Sa11). As a result, the memory contents relating to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are initialized. If the clear switch AK001 is turned on at step Sa6, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) at steps Sa9 and Sa10. , operations related to the initialization of the pachinko game machine 1 can be detected.

When the stored contents are initialized in step Sa11, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 51 is on based on the lock switch signal (step Sa12). If the lock switch 51 is turned on in step Sa12, the setting value can be changed by executing the setting change process (step Sa13). In the setting change process, it is possible to confirm the change status of the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display on the display monitor 29 . If the lock switch 51 is off at step Sa12 or after the setting change process is executed at step Sa13, the process proceeds to step Sa14.

If the lock switch 51 is off at step Sa12, the command 9000H serving as a RAM clear notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the mode in which the setting change process is executed on the condition that the lock switch 51 is turned on, and the setting change process is executed on the condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is open, The setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be changeable.

When the execution of the setting change process is started in step Sa13, the setting change state as a change permission state in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 Then, a command 9100H serving as a setting change start command is transmitted. When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the execution of the setting change process in step Sa13 ends, the setting change state and the accompanying game stop state are ended, and a command 93XXH serving as a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. be done. In addition to the case where the clear switch AK001 is on, if the lock switch 51 is on when the power-off inspection process was not executed, or when the execution result of the parity check was not normal, set The configuration is not limited to executing the change processing, and the setting change processing may be executed only when the RAM 102 is cleared when the clear switch AK001 is on and the lock switch 51 is on.

After that, the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is read out (step Sa14), and the value is used as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. At this time, the random number circuit 104 is initialized by the random number circuit setting process (step Sa15). Also, a setting is made to generate a periodic timer interrupt every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step Sa16). Then, interrupt prohibition setting (step Sa17), display random number update processing (step Sa18), initial value random number update processing (step Sa19), and interrupt permission setting (step Sa20) are repeatedly executed.

When the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process in the special symbol process process,
Based on the display result determination table corresponding to the set value and the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the variable display result, the variable display result of the special symbol and the effect symbol is "big hit" or "small hit". It is decided (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, when executing the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern determination table corresponding to the set value and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are used to set the variation pattern to any one of a plurality of types. You just have to decide. In this way, the game can be progressed with different degrees of advantage for the player by determining the variable display results at different rates according to the set values.

In this embodiment, when the clear switch AK001 is turned on in step Sa6 of the main process, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) in steps Sa9 to Sa11, and then in steps Sa12 and Sa13. The setting value can be changed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the storage contents of the RAM 102 may be initialized (cleared) after the setting value changeable state ends. . That is, if the clear switch AK001 is on in step Sa6, it is determined in step Sa12 whether or not the lock switch 51 is on. The stored contents are initialized (cleared), and if the lock switch 51 is turned on at step Sa12, setting change processing is executed at step Sa13. You may make it progress to Sa11. For example, when the RAM clear notification command is transmitted corresponding to the fact that the memory contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared), in the effect control board 12, the initialization notification is started along with the reception of the RAM clear notification command. there is something Therefore, if steps Sa9 to Sa11 are executed before step Sa13, initialization notification is executed and setting This may interfere with the work of changing values. On the other hand, after the setting change process of step Sa13 is completed, the memory contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) by steps Sa9 to Sa11, so that the initialization notification or the like is started after the change of the setting value is completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent troubles in changing the set values.

FIG. 8-19 shows the display mode of the display monitor 29 in the setting change process of step Sa13. As shown in FIG. 8-19(A), when the continuous ratio, role ratio, base, etc. are displayed on the display monitor 29, the power switch AK002 is operated by a staff member of the amusement arcade or the like, and the power supply is cut off due to the power cutoff. When stopped, the display on the display monitor 29 ends as shown in FIG. 8-19(B). After that, a game hall attendant or the like presses down the clear switch AK001 and operates the power switch AK002 while switching the lock switch 51 to ON. As shown in -19(C), on the display monitor 29, the set values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 are displayed on the first display portion 29A. When the setting changeover switch 52 is pressed by a game hall attendant or the like while the setting values are being displayed, the numerical values displayed on the first display section 29A are sequentially updated each time the operation is detected. to display. For example, when the pressing operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, if "1" is displayed on the first display section 29A, it is updated to "2", and if "2" is displayed, it is updated to "3". If "3" is displayed, it is updated to "1", so that the display of the first display section 29A can be cyclically updated between "1" to "3". After that, when the lock switch 51 is pushed in by a staff member of the game arcade or the like, the set value displayed on the first display section 29A is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 (updated memory) upon detection of the operation. do. At this time, the first display section 29A flashes to indicate that the new set value has been stored so that the game hall staff or the like can recognize it.

When the setting change process is executed in step Sa13, RA
The memory contents of M102 are initialized. Therefore, when the setting value is changed, the suspension storage based on the suspension data in the first special figure suspension storage unit 151A and the second special figure suspension storage unit 151B is erased. When a switching operation to turn off the lock switch 51 is performed by a staff member of the game arcade or the like, the operation is detected, and the setting change process is terminated. The CPU 103 becomes ready for a game by executing the processes after step Sa14 in the main process. As a result, for example, a variable display result, a jackpot type, a lottery for determination of a variable pattern, payout of prize balls, and the like can be executed. In the setting change process, the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 29 is not limited to the display of the stored values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102. A predetermined setting value such as "1" or "3" which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player may be displayed.

In the setting change process, the control for sequentially updating and displaying the numerical values displayed on the first display portion 29A of the display monitor 29 is limited to a mode of updating each time the pressing operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Instead, for example, the display may be updated and displayed every time the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected. For example, in the display monitor 29, when the clear switch AK001 is pressed while the set values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 are displayed on the first display section 29A, "1" is displayed on the first display section 29A. is displayed, it is updated to "2", if "2" is displayed, it is updated to "3", and if "3" is displayed, it is updated to "1". It suffices if the display on the display section 29A can be cyclically updated between "1" to "3". In this case, the clear switch AK001 used for initializing the stored contents of the RAM 102 can also be commonly used for changing the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. As a result, an increase in the manufacturing cost due to an increase in the device configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 can be prevented.

FIG. 8-20 shows the display mode of the display monitor 29 in the setting confirmation process of step AKS002. As shown in FIG. 8-20(A), when the continuous ratio, role ratio, base, etc., are displayed on the display monitor 29, the power switch AK002 is operated by a staff member of the amusement arcade or the like, and the power supply is interrupted by the power cutoff. When stopped, the display on the display monitor 29 ends as shown in FIG. 8-20(B). After that, when the power supply is started by turning on the power supply by operating the power switch AK002 while turning on the lock switch 51 without pressing the clear switch AK001, a staff member of the game hall or the like operates the power switch AK002. As shown in 8-20(C), on the display monitor 29, the set values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 are displayed on the first display portion 29A. In the state where the setting values are displayed, even if the setting changeover switch 52 is pressed by a game arcade attendant or the like, the numerical values displayed on the first display portion 29A cannot be updated. Thereafter, when a switching operation to turn off the lock switch 51 is performed by a staff member of the game arcade or the like, the operation is detected, and the setting confirmation process is terminated. The CPU 103 becomes ready for a game by executing the processes after step Sa14 in the main process. As a result, for example, a variable display result, a jackpot type, a lottery for determination of a variable pattern, payout of prize balls, and the like can be executed.

In this way, on the display monitor 29 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to display information about game value that enables confirmation of adjustment of the number of winning balls after installation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like. The display monitor 29 can display setting value information for progressing the game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different by changing the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Therefore, since it is not necessary to provide a display device for displaying the set value separately from the display device for displaying the information on the game value, it is possible to prevent an increase in the manufacturing cost due to an increase in the device configuration of the pachinko game machine 1. can.

In this embodiment, the display monitor 29 is used to display the setting values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the continuous ratio, the role ratio, the base, and the like. While the display monitor 29 is used to display the continuous ratio, the role ratio, the base, etc., the setting display unit different from the display monitor 29 is used to display the setting values. good too. As a result, it is possible to clearly separate the control for displaying the continuous ratio, role ratio, base, etc. using the display monitor 29 and the control for displaying the setting value using the setting display unit. Processing by a control program or the like can be distributed and simplified, and the control load can be reduced. In this way, when a setting display section different from the display monitor 29 is used, the setting display section may be arranged on a board different from the board on which the display monitor 29 is arranged, or the display monitor 29 is arranged. The setting display section may be arranged on a substrate common to the substrate.

(Description of modifications regarding configuration and game control in other characteristic parts)
FIG. 8-21 shows a display mode of the display monitor 29 in a modified example in which setting change processing can be executed during a game. The setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is not limited to a form that can be changed when the power is turned on, and the setting value may be changed during the game. In this case, after the CPU 103 starts processing after step Sa16 in the main processing, the gaming machine frame 3 is opened by a game hall staff member or the like, and the lock switch 51 is turned on and the clear switch AK001 is pressed. is detected, the display monitor 29 displays the setting value currently set in the pachinko game machine 1 on the first display portion 29A. In the state in which the setting values are displayed, when the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is pressed by a game hall attendant or the like, the setting values are displayed on the first display section 29A each time the operation is detected. Numeric values are updated sequentially and displayed. Then, when the lock switch 51 is pushed in by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the set value displayed on the first display section 29A is set as a new set value of the pachinko game machine 1 by detecting the operation. , is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102 .

The set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is limited to a form that can be changed when the power is turned on, based on the detection of the action of turning on the lock switch 51 and the detection of the action of pressing the clear switch AK001 on. Instead, it may be possible to change at power-on based on detection of at least the operation of switching on the lock switch 51 . For example, even if the action of pressing the clear switch AK001 is not detected when the power is turned on, the memory contents of the RAM 102 are not initialized (cleared) based on the detection of the action of switching the lock switch 51 to the ON state. The setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be changed based on the detection of the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 to ON after restoring the stored contents at the time of power failure. In this way, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not initialized by initializing (clearing) the storage contents of the RAM 102 with the start of power supply upon power-on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the time of power-on Control may be performed to change the set values that have been set.

When a new setting value is stored, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, the special figure reservation memory, general figure reservation memory, game control flag setting unit 152, game control timer setting unit 153, game control counter Various flags and data stored in the setting unit 154, the game control buffer setting unit 155, etc. may be deleted. In this way, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a new hold memory in which the variable display result becomes a big hit due to the change in the set value, and the possibility of a new normal variable winning ball device 6B. It is possible to prevent the opening of (the occurrence of a normal pattern hit) and the unreasonable big hit of the variation display result during execution. Further, by clearing the data holding area 150 for game control, the big winning opening is closed during the big winning game, or the normal variable winning ball device 6B is closed when the normal variable winning ball device 6B is open. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from obtaining an inappropriate profit. Further, when the setting change process is interrupted without setting a new set value, it is possible to prevent the pending memory from being erased even though the new set value is not set. In addition, it is not limited to the form of clearing the pending memory based on the setting of a new set value in the pachinko game machine 1, and the set value originally set in the pachinko game machine 1 is reset. The pending storage may be cleared in any case. The pending memory may be cleared at the timing when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the display monitor 29, that is, when the CPU 103 executes the setting change process. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the change of the set value from being accurately reflected in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

It is not limited to the form in which the first big prize opening and the second big prize opening are closed based on the setting of a new setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, and the pachinko game machine 1 is displayed on the display monitor 29. The first big winning opening and the second big winning opening may be closed at the timing when the set value is displayed, that is, when the setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 . As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the change of the set value from being accurately reflected in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

FIG. 8-22 shows a display mode in a modification in which the display monitor 29 is not provided with the first display section 29A capable of displaying the set values. The display monitor 29 is provided with five display portions from a first display portion 29A to a fifth display portion 29E. The setting values are not limited to being displayed on the first display section 29A, and the display section for displaying the set values of the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base during display may not be provided. In FIG. 8-22(A), display portions corresponding to the second display portion 29B to the fifth display portion 29E of the display monitor 29 display the consecutive ratio, the role ratio, and the base, and correspond to the first display portion 29A. The setting value is not displayed by the display unit that is used.

FIG. 8-22(B) shows an example of display control of the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base when no display section for displaying the set values is provided. In this case, the continuous ratio, role ratio, and base at setting value 1 are colored red, the continuous ratio, role ratio, and base at setting value 2 are green, and the continuous ratio, role ratio, and base at setting value 3 are blue. displayed. By displaying the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base in different display colors depending on the set value, it is possible to easily grasp which set value the numerical value is based on. In this display control example, as in the above embodiment, it is possible to switch the display of the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base at set value 1 at intervals of 5 seconds. Switch display of continuous ratio, role ratio, and base at 5-second intervals to switching display of continuous ratio, role ratio, and base at setting value 2 at 5-second intervals. , 5-second intervals of the base, and the display can be cyclically changed. Alternatively, the continuous ratio at setting value 1, the continuous ratio at setting value 2, and the continuous ratio at setting value 3 are switched at intervals of 5 seconds, and the role ratio at setting value 1, the role ratio at setting value 2, and the role ratio at setting value 3 are displayed. Switching display of the role ratio at intervals of 5 seconds, and switching display at intervals of 5 seconds between the base at the set value 1, the base at the set value 2, and the base at the set value 3 are cyclically operated for each operation of the display changeover switch 300. changes may be possible.

The display monitor 29 is not limited to a form capable of displaying the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base for each set value, and can display the continuous ratio, the role, and the like according to any one of the set values 1 to 3. Only the ratio and base may be displayed. For example, the continuous ratio, role ratio, and base are calculated for each of setting values 1 to 3, and among the calculated continuous ratio, role ratio, and base, the highest or lowest value, or the longest or shortest measurement time. Only values and the like may be displayed on the display monitor 29 . Furthermore, among the calculated consecutive ratio, role ratio, and base, the highest or lowest value or the longest or shortest value for the measurement time is set as an initial display on the display monitor 29, and the display changeover switch 300 is operated to switch from the initial display to another value. The display on the display monitor 29 may be switched to the value of .

The display monitor 29 displays two or more of the continuous ratio, role ratio, and base at setting value 1, the continuous ratio, role ratio, and base at setting value 2, and the continuous ratio, role ratio, and base at setting value 3. It is possible to calculate the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base at the set values, and in addition to or instead of the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base for each set value, the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base at two or more of these set values. It may be possible to display on the display monitor 29 . In this way, by enabling the display monitor 29 to display the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base at two or more set values, it is possible to grasp the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in more detail. Note that the composite information is not limited to the form in which the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base, which are the sums of two or more set values, can be calculated and displayed on the display monitor 29. , the role ratio, and the average value of the base may be calculated and displayed on the display monitor 29 .

The display monitor 29 may display only the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base according to the set values. Furthermore, on the display monitor 29, the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base according to the set values are displayed as an initial display, and according to the operation of the display changeover switch 300, the initial display changes to other setting values. You may switch to display of continuous ratio, role ratio, and base. The display monitor 29 may display numerical values other than the number of winning balls per predetermined time (for example, one hour), the consecutive ratio, the role ratio, and the base as the predetermined information according to the set value.

For example, under specific conditions such as immediately after the end of a big hit game or during a time saving state, by using a special variation pattern determination table that is different from the normal variation pattern determination table, the variation display with a specific variation pattern than normal ( For example, the shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4)) may be easily executed. If the fluctuation pattern can be determined using the special fluctuation pattern determination table, depending on the set value, end the fluctuation pattern determination using the special fluctuation pattern determination table and switch to normal determination You can vary the timing. Specifically, when the set value is 1, the variation pattern is determined using the special variation pattern determination table up to the 15th variation display after the end of the big win game, and 16 times after the end of the big win game. After the first time, the variation pattern is determined using the normal variation pattern determination table, and if the set value is 2, the special variation pattern determination table until the 10th variation display after the end of the big hit game is used to determine the variation pattern, and after the 11th time after the end of the big hit game, the variation pattern is determined using the normal time variation pattern determination table, and if the set value is 3, the big hit game A variation pattern is determined by using a special variation pattern determination table up to the fifth variation display after completion, and a variation pattern is determined by using a normal variation pattern determination table from the sixth time after the end of the jackpot game. good.

After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed in step Sa9 in the main processing, or after the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, in the first 10th variation, with a special variation pattern When the variable display is executed, it suggests that a setting value advantageous to the player (for example, setting value 1) is set, and after initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the pachinko game machine After the set value set to 1 is changed, when the variation display is executed with a special variation pattern at the 30th variation, a set value advantageous to the player (for example, set value 1) is set. It is also possible to have a game feature in which attention is paid to whether or not the variable display is executed in a special variable pattern at a specific timing or a specific number of variable displays, such as confirming that there is. When the pachinko machine 1 has such a game property, when the set value is 1, the RAM 102 is initialized (cleared), or the pachinko machine 1 is set. After the set value is changed, the ratio of execution of variation with a special variation pattern is the highest in the first 10th variation, and when the set value is 3, the RAM 102 is initialized ( Clear) is executed, or after the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, so that the ratio of executing the variation in the special variation pattern in the first 10th variation is the lowest. In addition, only when the set value is 1, after the RAM 102 is initialized (cleared) or after the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the first In the 30th variation of , the variation may be executed with a special variation pattern.

The switching condition for switching the fluctuation pattern judgment table for determining the fluctuation pattern from the special fluctuation pattern judgment table to the normal fluctuation pattern judgment table (the number of fluctuations until switching the table) varies depending on the set value You may decide by a ratio. Due to the different switching conditions for switching the variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern according to the set value, the determination ratio of a specific variation pattern (for example, shortened non-reach (PA1-4)) is reduced. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the variation pattern.

After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( For example, 100 times) until the fluctuation display is executed, the determination ratio of the fluctuation display of a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach) is determined using each fluctuation pattern determination table at normal time may be increased or decreased compared to the case where the variation pattern is determined by In this case, when the set value is 1, when it is 2, and when it is 3, even if it is decided to execute the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach at different decision ratios good. Thus, after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses, or Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the number of fluctuation display times of the super reach fluctuation pattern until the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the effect of the fluctuation display of the super reach fluctuation pattern is achieved. can increase Furthermore, after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time elapses, or the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times. A variation pattern that can be determined only until the setting value is set is provided for each set value, and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is displayed to the player by executing the variation display according to the variation pattern according to these set values. Notification may be possible.

After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( For example, until the variable display of 100 times) is executed, the determination ratio of the variable pattern other than the super reach such as non-reach and normal reach differs according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. Alternatively, depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, a variation pattern different from the normal variation pattern such as non-reach, normal reach, super reach (for example, variation time is extremely short such as 0.1 The determination rate of the variation pattern and the variation pattern with an extremely long variation time such as 10 minutes may be different.

After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( For example, during a specific period until the variable display is executed 100 times, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be suggested at a rate at which a specific effect is executed. For example, it is possible to execute a high setting suggesting performance suggesting that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is a set value advantageous to the player, and the setting set in the pachinko game machine 1 is set for a specific period. When the value is 1 (the most advantageous set value for the player), the high set value suggestion effect is most likely to be executed, and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3 (the most unfavorable set value for the player) ), the execution of the high set value suggesting effect is most difficult. In the specific period, at least one of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach depends on whether or not the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 has been changed since the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 was stopped last time. You may make it the determination ratio of a fluctuation pattern different.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured as a pachinko game machine capable of controlling a game state to a probability variable state after the end of the big win game, and the game after the end of the big win game is performed based on the passage of the game ball through the third count switch during the big win game. The state may be controllable to a variable probability state. In this case, as the jackpot type, the jackpot type that opens the second jackpot during the jackpot game, that is, the jackpot type that allows the game ball to pass through the third count switch during the jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as jackpot X); A jackpot classification (hereinafter referred to as jackpot Y) is provided in which the second jackpot is not opened during the jackpot game, that is, the game ball cannot pass through the third count switch during the jackpot game, and the determination ratio of the jackpot X and the jackpot Y is provided. may be varied according to the set value. By doing so, it is possible to vary the rate at which the game state is controlled to the probability variable state after the end of the big win game according to the set value, so that the game interest can be improved.

In addition to or in place of the fact that the ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit and the ratio of determination of the big hit type are different, or instead, the number of prize balls when the game balls enter each prize opening, and the number of prize balls in each round during the big win game The upper limit winning number of game balls into the winning opening may be varied according to the set value. Furthermore, the pattern of opening the first and second big winning holes during the big winning game may be made different according to the set values. As a result, the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state can be changed according to the set value, so that the game interest can be improved.

A movable body may be provided in the pachinko game machine 1, and a movable body performance may be executed in which the movable body is operated during a game such as a variable display or a jackpot game. When such a movable body is provided, it is possible to execute variable winning initialization control such as checking the movement of the regulating member inside the second prize winning opening, and to check the operation of the movable body and move the movable body to the initial position. When a new setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, or when the pachinko game machine 1), the variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be executed. As a result, the new set values can be accurately reflected in the motion of the regulating member and the movable body. Variable winning initialization control and movable body initialization control may be executed after execution of step Sa13 or step Sa14 in the main process. For example, at the timing when the first timer interrupt occurs, the variable winning initialization control or the movable body initialization control may be executed. When the variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control can be executed, the variable winning initialization control may be started before the movable body initialization control. Alternatively, the variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be started at the same time, and the variable winning initialization control may be terminated prior to the movable body initialization control. As a result, the initialization control related to the winning of game balls can be properly performed.

The determination ratio of the super reach variation pattern may differ according to the set value. The specific variable display pattern may be a variation pattern different from the super reach variation pattern. The setting of which variation pattern is to be the specific variable display pattern can be arbitrarily changed according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

FIGS. 8-23 and 8-24 show modifications in which the lock switch 51 and setting switch 52 are installed on the side of the main board 11. FIG. By arranging the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated unless the game machine frame 3 is opened by a game hall staff. be. In addition to this, by providing a security cover 500A that covers the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed, pachinko when the game machine frame 3 is closed is provided. It may be possible to prevent unauthorized change of setting values of the gaming machine 1 .

The security cover 500A is attached to the lower right side of the outer frame 1a. As a result, when the game machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A approaches the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the rear side of the pachinko game machine 1, making the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 inoperable. can be On the other hand, when the game machine frame 3 is opened, the security cover 500A is separated from the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, so that the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 can be operated. A lock switch 51 and a setting changeover switch 52 are covered with a cover body from the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the cover body is covered with a security cover 500A from the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the frame 3 for the game machine is closed. By covering the gaming machine 1 from the rear side (pressing the cover body forward with the security cover 500A), the unauthorized change of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed is more strongly prevented. can be prevented. When the setting changeover switch 52 is replaced by the clear switch AK001, instead of the setting changeover switch 52, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with a cover or security cover 500A.

FIG. 8-25 shows a modification in which a security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 3. FIG. Specifically, the security cover 500B may be provided so as to be slidable in the horizontal direction with respect to the gaming machine frame 3 . When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the right end of the security cover 500B is sandwiched between the right side of the outer frame 1a and the gaming machine frame 3, and the security cover 500B has the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 attached to the rear surface. It should be made immovable from the state covered from the side. When the game machine frame 3 is opened, the lock switch 51 and the setting switch 52 can be operated by sliding the security cover 500B. When the setting changeover switch 52 is replaced by the clear switch AK001, instead of the setting changeover switch 52, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with the security cover 500B.

FIG. 8-26 shows a variant with a pivotable security cover. Specifically, the left end portion of the security cover 500C may be rotatably supported on a vertical axis provided on the back side of the frame 3 for gaming machines. In such a case, when the game machine frame 3 is closed, the right end of the security cover 500C is sandwiched between the right side of the outer frame 1a and the game machine frame 3, and the security cover 500C is set as the lock switch 51. The changeover switch 52 may be made immovable from the state where it is covered from the rear side. When the game machine frame 3 is opened, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 can be operated by rotating the security cover 500C around a pivot (not shown). When the setting changeover switch 52 is replaced by the clear switch AK001, instead of the setting changeover switch 52, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with the security cover 500C.

When these security covers are provided so as to overlap the main board 11, the security covers are made of a transparent resin material or the like so as not to hinder the visibility of the mounting surface of the main board 11 and the sealing seal. good too.

The pachinko game machine 1 may have different game properties such as a variable probability loop type and a variable V probability type. In the case of the probability variable loop type or the V probability variable type, a function (so-called small winning time) that can increase the number of balls by the small winning that opens the first big winning opening after the end of a specific big winning game is added. You may have In the case of a gaming machine with a small winning time function, the big winning probability is changed according to the set value (for example, if the set value is 1, the big winning probability in the normal state is set to 1/200, is 1/20 and set value 2
In the case of the normal state jackpot probability is 1/300 and the variable probability state jackpot probability is 1/30) By setting one set value, the first hit probability is the other set value It is easier to enter the small hit time because it is higher than when is set, but the probability of getting a big hit during variable probability control is also higher than when other setting values are set, so the small hit time ends easier to do. In other words, when a pachinko machine that can execute variable probability control is equipped with a small winning time function, the higher the set value that gives a higher jackpot probability in the normal state, the higher the probability of entering the small winning time. It is difficult for the winning time to continue, and when a set value with a low jackpot probability in the normal state is set, the probability of entering the small winning time is low and the small winning time tends to continue. Therefore, in the variable probability loop type or V variable probability type pachinko game machine 1, not only is it possible to expand the range of games by installing the function of the small winning time, but also the set value with the low probability of big winning is set. Even if the pachinko game machine 1 is used, the intention to play the game can be induced in the player.

In the V probability variable type pachinko game machine 1, the opening pattern of the probability variable control determination large winning opening in the probability variable control determining round is set to a long-term opening pattern (an opening pattern in which the game ball is likely to enter the probability variable control determining large winning opening ) and a short-term opening pattern (an opening pattern in which the game ball is unlikely to enter the variable probability control big winning opening), these long-term opening patterns and short-term opening patterns are determined according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. By determining at different ratios, it is possible to vary the substantial probability variation rush probability (percentage of probability variation big hit).

A gate for determining the type of big win is provided at a predetermined position (for example, above the second big prize opening) in the game area, and the game ball passes through the gate for determining the type of big win after special symbols are derived and displayed in combination indicating the big win. A random number value MR2 for judging the type of big win may be extracted at this timing, and a big win game corresponding to the type of big win determined based on the value of the extracted MR2 may be started. When the jackpot type determination gate is provided in this way, the jackpot types are determined at different ratios according to the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a 16-round jackpot and a 4-round jackpot are provided as the jackpot types). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the rate of being controlled to the jackpot game state of 16 rounds is the highest, and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the ratio of being controlled to the 16-round jackpot game state is the lowest).

The lock switch 51, the setting switch 52, or the clear switch AK001 may be provided on the front side of the game machine frame 3. When the lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52, or the clear switch AK001 is provided on the front side of the game machine frame 3 in this way, the lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52, or the clear switch AK001 can be used as the ball hitting operation handle or the ball shooting device. By providing it in the vicinity, it can be made inoperable unless the glass door frame 3a is opened.

Different ratios are determined according to the set values, as long as it is determined whether or not to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot game state, at least. The variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. While determining whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit" at different rates according to the set value, the big hit type at a common rate regardless of the set value In the case of determining the variation pattern, even if the set value is changed, the determination ratio of the variation pattern is not changed, so the set value is not suggested to the player or the like, or is difficult to suggest. When not only the variation display result but also the variation pattern is determined at different ratios according to the set value, when the set value is changed, the determination ratio of the variation pattern is also changed. Setting values can be suggested or become easier to suggest.

As described above, in the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, the CPU 103 executes the main processing when the power is turned on, and the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 operate. Depending on the detection result, it is possible to control any of the setting change state, setting confirmation state, initialization state, and power failure recovery state. The setting change state is a change permission state in which the setting value is permitted to be changed by operating the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001. The setting confirmation state is a state in which set values can be confirmed on the display monitor 29 . Unlike the setting change state and the setting confirmation state, the initialization state is a state in which the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared). The power failure restoration state is a state in which the contents stored in the RAM 102 have been restored to the contents at the time of the power failure.

FIG. 8-27 shows an example of state control in response to switch detection at power up. If the lock switch 51 is on and the clear switch AK001 is on when the power supply is started by turning on the power by operating the power switch AK002, the setting change process is executed in step Sa13 of the main process. By being executed, the setting change state is controlled. In this case, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized in step Sa9 of the main process. On the other hand, if the lock switch 51 is on and the clear switch AK001 is off when the power supply is started, setting confirmation processing is executed in step AKS002 of the main processing, and the setting Controls the confirmation state. In this case, step Sa9 of the main process is not executed, and the contents stored in RAM 102 are restored to the contents at the time of power failure through steps Sa41 and Sa42. When the power supply is started, if the lock switch 51 is off and the clear switch AK001 is on, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized in step Sa9 of the main process, and the initialization state is established. control. In this case, it is determined in step Sa12 of the main process that the lock switch 51 is off, so the setting change process in step Sa13 is not executed. If the lock switch 51 is off and the clear switch AK001 is off when the power supply is started, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are restored to the contents at the time of the power failure through steps Sa41 and Sa42 of the main processing. By doing so, the power failure recovery state is controlled. In this case, it is determined in step AKS001 of the main process that the lock switch 51 is off, so the setting confirmation process in step AKS002 is not executed. In this way, along with the operation of turning on the power using the power switch AK002, the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 detect various operations such as on/off switching operations and pressing operations by the staff of the game arcade. , the state can be controlled according to the detection results.

(Description of the means related to the above characteristic part)
The above embodiment includes the following features. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine in which setting values can be set, for example, described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a dedicated setting value display means for displaying the set value is provided, and an increase in the cost of the gaming machine can be prevented. There was a problem that it was not possible to Therefore, as a game machine of means 1 related to the characteristic part for solving this problem,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games using game media (e.g., game balls) and being controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot game state) advantageous to the player,
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change process of Sa13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value,
A game that gives a game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a first big winning opening, a second big winning opening, etc.) Value giving means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the process during the opening of the jackpot, etc.);
information display means (for example, a display monitor 29, etc.) capable of displaying information about the game value imparted by the game value imparting means;
with
The information display means can display the setting values set by the setting means (for example, display by the first display section 29A of the display monitor 29).
According to this means 1, there is no need to separately provide a display device for displaying the set values, thus preventing an increase in the cost of the game machine. can be done.

As a game machine of the means 2 of the characteristic part,
The information display means can display predetermined information according to the set value (for example, a portion of the display monitor 29 where the continuous ratio, role ratio, base can be displayed, etc.).
The game machine described in the means 1 characterized in that, in the means 2, it is possible to easily grasp the state of the game machine.

As a game machine of the means 3 of the characteristic part,
The information display means can sequentially display predetermined information of each set value (for example, the display monitor 29 can display short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1, base 2, etc.). The part that is displayed sequentially at 5-second intervals, etc.)
The gaming machine described in the means 2 characterized in that, in the means 3, it is possible to easily grasp the predetermined information of each set value.

As a game machine of means 4 of the characteristic part,
The information display means can display the predetermined information of each setting value in different display modes (for example, at setting value 1, the continuous ratio, role ratio, and base are displayed in red; at setting value 2, the continuous ratio, role ratio, and base are displayed in red. The role ratio and base are displayed in green, and with a setting value of 3, the continuous ratio, role ratio, and base are displayed in blue, etc.)
The game machine described in the means 2 or 3 characterized by the above is described, and in the means 4, it is possible to easily grasp the predetermined information of each set value.

As a game machine of means 5 of the characteristic part,
Equipped with operation means (for example, display changeover switch 300, etc.),
The information display means can switch and display the predetermined information of each set value according to the operation of the operation means (for example, by operating the display changeover switch 300, the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base of the set value 1 can be displayed. The part that switches the display to the continuous ratio, role ratio, and base display of setting value 2, and the display of continuous ratio, role ratio, and base of setting value 2 to the display of setting value 3, continuous ratio, role ratio, and base switching part, etc.)
The gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 4 is described, characterized in that, in this means 5, it is possible to easily grasp the predetermined information of each set value.

As the game machine of the means 6 of the characteristic part,
The information display means displays predetermined information according to the setting value set by the setting means (for example, a portion that can display only the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base according to the set value) Such)
The game machine according to any one of means 2 to 5 is described, and in this means 6, the work of confirming the predetermined information of the set value set by the setting means is easily performed. be able to.

As a game machine of means 7 of the characteristic part,
Calculation means capable of calculating information related to the game value imparted by the game value imparting means The portion that calculates the ratio (%), the base calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls (base 1 (%)), and the base calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls (base 2 (%)) etc.)
The calculating means can calculate the information individually for each set value (for example, general winning prize balls, first starter prize balls, normal electric prize balls, special electric prize balls, total prize balls, The input total is stored in a storage area (ring buffer) according to the setting value that is set, such as a portion that can be calculated individually for each setting value),
The information display means displays only the information corresponding to any one specific setting value among the setting values (for example, continuous ratio corresponding to any one setting value of setting values 1 to 3, Role ratio, part that only the base can be displayed, etc.)
The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6 is described, characterized in that, in this means 7, information can be easily confirmed.

As the game machine of the means 8 of the characteristic part, calculation means capable of calculating information on the game value given by the game value giving means , and cumulative consecutive ratio (%), role ratio (%), base calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls (base 1 (%)), base calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls Equipped with (such as a part that calculates the base 2 (%)),
The calculating means can individually calculate individual information, which is the information corresponding to each setting value, and can calculate composite information, which is the information corresponding to two or more different setting values (for example, The information display means is capable of displaying the information and the composite information (for example, the part for calculating the continuous ratio, the role ratio, the base, etc., summed up at two or more set values). Part that can be displayed on the display monitor 29 by calculating the ratio, role ratio, base, etc.)
The gaming machine described in any one of means 1 to 7 is described, characterized by: According to this means 8, the state of the gaming machine can be grasped in more detail.

(Description of production control related to other characteristic parts)
FIG. 8-28 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the embodiment having the above-described characterizing portion. This production control main process may be executed instead of the production control main process in the above embodiment. In the production control main process of the present embodiment, the production control CPU 120 executes the same initialization process (step AKS011) as in the above-described embodiment, and then, unlike the above-described embodiment, power-on command processing (step AKS012). After executing the power-on command process, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step AKS013), as in the above embodiment. The process of step AKS013 is repeated and waited. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt flag is ON (step AKS013; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step AKS014), command analysis processing (step AKS015), effect control process processing (Step AKS016) and random number update processing for effect (Step AKS017) are executed in order.

FIG. 8-29 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS012 as power-on command process. For example, the effect control CPU 120 acquires the effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 11 with the start of power supply as a received command, and determines the contents thereof. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the received command is command 9000H, which is a RAM clear notification command (step AKS021). If it is not a RAM clearing notification command (step AKS021; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is command 9200H, which is a power failure restoration designation command (step AKS022). If it is not a power failure recovery stop command (step AKS022; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is command 9100H, which is a setting change start command (step AKS023). If it is not a setting change start command (step AKS023; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is command 9400H, which is a setting confirmation start command (step AKS024). If it is not a setting confirmation start command (step AKS024; No), the process returns to step AKS021 and waits by repeatedly executing steps AKS021 to AKS024 until a reception command is acquired. If a predetermined error determination time elapses without the received command being acquired, it may be notified that an error has occurred in the received command.

When it is determined that the received command is the setting change start command at step AKS023 (step AKS023; Yes), the game stop state start process is executed (step AKS025). In the game stop state starting process, in response to the game stop state for stopping the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1, the progress of the effect control accompanying the progress of the game is stopped. In the game stop state start time processing executed in step AKS025, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for commands other than the setting change end command, the reception is set to be invalid. do it. As a result, various effects accompanying the progress of the game, such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit, may be regulated so as not to be executed. When the setting change start command is received, in the game stop state corresponding to the setting change state, various effects associated with the progress of the game that can be executed when the game is not in the game stop state are not executed. A limit is provided as a range or limit.

After executing the game stop state starting process in step AKS025, control is performed to start setting change notification (step AKS026). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a setting change notification screen on the effect display device 5 based on control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting change notification, and outputs setting change notification sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, control should be performed. After the setting change notification control is started in this way, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step AKS027). In step AKS027, if the command received from the main board 11 is the command 93XXH, which is a setting change end command, it is determined that the setting change is finished. If no setting change end command is received and the setting change is not to be ended (step AKS027; No), step AKS027 is repeatedly executed and waits.

If it is determined at step AKS027 to end the setting change (step AKS027; Yes), control is performed to end the setting change notification (step AKS028). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control so as to end the display of the setting change notification screen on the effect display device 5 and end the output of the setting change notification sound by the speakers 8L and 8R. After the control of the setting change notification is finished in this manner, the game stop state end processing is executed (step AKS029). In the game stop state termination process, the command reception from the main board 11, which has been disabled, may be set to be enabled. As a result, the regulation may be released so that various effects accompanying the progress of the game, such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit, can be executed.

After that, control for executing initialization notification is performed (step AKS030). For example, the effect control CPU 120 initializes the effect display device 5 in an initialization notification period until a predetermined initialization notification time elapses based on control data prepared in advance corresponding to the initialization notification. Control may be performed such that the notification screen is displayed and the initialization notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Even when it is determined at step AKS021 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; Yes), the initialization notification can be executed by proceeding to step AKS030. In this way, it is possible to notify that the contents stored in the RAM 102 have been initialized (cleared) in response to the detection of the operation of depressing the clear switch AK001 with the start of power supply upon power-on.

When it is determined at step AKS024 that the received command is a setting confirmation start command (step AKS024; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step AKS031). In the game stop state start time processing executed in step AKS031, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main substrate 11, for commands other than the setting confirmation end command, the reception is set to be invalid. do it. As a result, various effects accompanying the progress of the game, such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit, may be regulated so as not to be executed. When the setting confirmation start command is received, in the game stop state corresponding to the setting confirmation state, various effects accompanying the progress of the game that can be executed when the game is not in the game stop state are not executed. A limit is provided as a range or limit.

After executing the game stop state starting process at step AKS031, control is performed to start notification of setting confirmation (step AKS032). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a setting confirmation notification screen on the effect display device 5 based on control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting confirmation notification, and outputs setting confirmation notification sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, control should be performed. After the setting confirmation notification control is started in this way, it is determined whether or not to end the setting confirmation (step AKS033). In step AKS033, if the command received from the main board 11 is the command 9401H, which is a setting confirmation end command, it may be determined that the setting confirmation is finished. If the setting confirmation end command is not received and the setting confirmation is not finished (step AKS033; No), step AKS033 is repeatedly executed and waits.

If it is determined at step AKS033 that the setting confirmation is finished (step AKS033; Yes), control is performed to finish setting confirmation notification (step AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control such that the display of the setting confirmation notification screen on the effect display device 5 is terminated, and the output of the setting confirmation notification sound by the speakers 8L and 8R is terminated. Thus, after the control of the setting confirmation notification is finished, the game stop state end processing is executed (step AKS035). As a result, the regulation may be released so that various effects accompanying the progress of the game, such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit, can be executed.

After that, control may be performed to execute power failure restoration notification. For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a power failure restoration notification screen on the effect display device 5 based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the power failure restoration notification, and outputs the power failure restoration notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. may be controlled. Even when it is determined in step AKS022 that the received command is a power failure recovery designation command (step AKS022; Yes), power failure recovery notification may be executed. In these cases, it is possible to notify that the contents stored in the RAM 102 have been restored to the contents at the time of the power failure in response to the case where the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is not detected when the power supply is started by turning on the power. good.

FIG. 8-30 shows the priority of control with respect to notification, screen display, etc. by effect control in this embodiment. When the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state with the start of power supply upon power-on, the pachinko game machine 1 enters a game stop state in which progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 executes a game stop state start process at step AKS025 or step AKS031 of the power-on command process. After the game stop state start processing is executed, the reception of a command different from the setting change end command or the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and the normal performance control is regulated so as not to be executed. Therefore, the priority AKP01 of setting change notification and setting confirmation notification is the highest priority among the priorities related to effect control. For example, the priority AKP02 of the power saving function setting screen is lower than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. The setting screen for the power saving function, etc. is displayed when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 (game machine frame 3) is set to a predetermined position as a specific position. This is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device 5 in order to enable the setting of presence/absence, type, current date and time by RTC, and the like. The priority AKP03 for the magnet error notification is lower than the priority AKP02 for the power saving function setting screen, etc., and is therefore lower than the priority AKP01 for the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. The priority AKP0Z of the normal game screen corresponding to the progress of the game at normal time is the lowest priority among the priorities related to the effect control, so it has a lower priority than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and setting confirmation notification. degrees.

As described above, the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification is higher than the priority AKP02 of the setting screen such as the power saving function, etc. Therefore, the control to start the setting change notification is performed by step AKS026 of the power-on command processing. or when control to start setting confirmation notification is performed in step AKS032, it is assumed that the switch position of the output amount selector switch is temporarily switched to a specific position before the end of setting change or setting confirmation. Even if this is the case, the display of the power saving function setting screen does not start when the output amount selector switch is switched. In this way, the display regarding the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, such as the setting change notification screen and the setting confirmation notification screen, is displayed with priority over the display regarding the output amount or output control of the effect, such as the power saving function setting screen. As a result, the set values are appropriately displayed, so that it is possible to prevent the work of changing the set values from being hindered.

(Description of Modified Example of Effect Control in Other Characteristic Portions)
FIG. 8-31 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect control main process that is executed in the modified example in which the setting confirmation process can be executed during the game. The setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is not limited to a form that can be confirmed when the power is turned on, and confirmation of the setting value may be executed during the game. In this case, after the CPU 103 starts processing after step Sa16 in the main processing, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened by a game hall staff member or the like and a switching operation to turn on the lock switch 51 is performed. When the operation is detected, the display monitor 29 displays the setting value currently set in the pachinko game machine 1 on the first display portion 29A. This display is not changed even if the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is pressed by a staff member of the game hall or the like, and is a display for confirming the setting value currently set in the pachinko game machine 1. there is When the execution of the setting confirmation process is started during the game, it becomes a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A command 9400H is transmitted. When the execution of the setting confirmation process is completed, the setting confirmation state is completed, and a command 9401H serving as a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In the effect control main process in the modified example, after executing the random number update process for effect in step AKS017, the ongoing setting confirmation process (step AKS01A) is executed, and then the process returns to step AKS013.

FIG. 8-32 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS01A as the ongoing setting confirmation process. For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display monitor 29 is in the process of confirming the setting values that have been set so that they can be confirmed (step AKS051). In step AKS051, for example, it may be determined that the settings are being checked during the period from when the control in step AKS058 is performed until when the control in step AKS060 is performed. If it is not during setting confirmation (step AKS051; No), it is determined whether or not a setting confirmation start command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received (step AKS052). At this time, when a setting confirmation start command is received (step AKS052; Yes), it is determined whether or not a game is in progress in the pachinko game machine 1 (step AKS053). In step AKS053, it is determined that the game is not in progress during the period from the reception of the customer waiting demo specification command transmitted from the main board 11 to the reception of the first variation start command or the second variation start command, During other periods, it is determined that the game is in progress.

When it is determined that the game is in progress at step AKS053 (step AKS053; Yes), the progress setting confirmation flag is set to ON state (step AKS054). The in-progress setting confirmation flag is a flag indicating that a setting confirmation start command has been received while the game is in progress. If it is determined in step AKS052 that the setting confirmation start command has not been received (step AKS052; No), or after turning on the in-progress setting confirmation flag in step AKS054, the customer waiting sent from the main board 11 It is determined whether or not a demonstration designation command has been received (step AKS055). At this time, if no customer waiting demo designation command is received (step AKS055; No), the ongoing setting confirmation process is terminated.

If it is determined at step AKS055 that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been received (step AKS055; Yes), it is determined whether or not the ongoing setting confirmation flag is on (step AKS056). At this time, if the in-progress setting confirmation flag is off (step AKS056; No), the in-progress setting confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, if the in-progress setting confirmation flag is ON (step AKS056; Yes), the in-progress setting confirmation flag is cleared to be turned off (step AKS057), and then control is performed to start notification of setting confirmation. (Step AKS058). Also when it is determined that the game is not in progress at step AKS053 (step AKS053; No), the process proceeds to step AKS058, and control for starting setting confirmation notification is performed. Thus, when the setting confirmation start command is received while the game is in progress, the setting confirmation notification can be started after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command.

If it is determined at step AKS051 that the setting confirmation is in progress (step AKS051; Yes), it is determined whether or not a setting confirmation end command has been received (step AKS059). At this time, if the setting confirmation end command has not been received (step AKS059; No), the ongoing setting confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting confirmation end command has been received (step AKS059; Yes), control is performed to end the setting confirmation notification (step AKS060).

By executing such a setting confirmation process during progress, when the setting value set by the setting confirmation process being executed during the game is displayed on the display monitor 29, on the side of the effect control board 12, After receiving the customer waiting demo display command transmitted from the main board 11, the display of the setting confirmation notification screen and the output of the setting confirmation notification sound can be started. Thus, when the set value can be confirmed during the execution of the performance accompanying the progress of the game, the performance being executed is not stopped, thereby preventing inconvenience due to the confirmation of the set value.

In the case where the setting confirmation process is executed during the game on the side of the main board 11, the setting confirmation state may be controlled after the customer waiting demo designation command can be transmitted. In this case, for example, a setting confirmation start command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 together with the customer waiting demonstration designation command. Alternatively, instead of transmitting a setting confirmation start command together with a customer waiting demo designation command, a dedicated command corresponding to setting confirmation during a game is transmitted, and after the progress of the game is completed, the set value is set. You may make it control the state which can confirm.

Alternatively, the set values are displayed on the display monitor 29 provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the effect display device 5 does not need to display corresponding to the set values. Therefore, when executing the setting confirmation process during the game, without transmitting the setting confirmation start command etc. from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the display monitor 29 can be displayed so that the setting value can be confirmed. You may make it control to start. In this case, the effect control board 12 may be controlled by the effect control CPU 120 or the like so as to continue the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game.

In addition to setting change notification and setting confirmation notification, setting change end notification and setting confirmation end notification may be executable. For example, in the power-on command process, the setting change notification is completed by the control in step AKS028, and the setting change end notification is started with the start of the setting change end notification period, and the setting change end notification period is ended. The setting change end notification may be terminated. In addition, in the power-on command processing, under the control of step AKS034, the notification of setting confirmation ends, and the notification of completion of setting confirmation is started with the start of the notification period of completion of setting confirmation. The notification of completion of setting confirmation may be ended.

In the setting change notification, control may be performed such that the setting change notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R without displaying the setting change notification screen on the effect display device 5. FIG. In the setting confirmation notification, control may be performed so that the setting confirmation notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R without displaying the setting confirmation notification screen on the effect display device 5. FIG. Alternatively, in the setting change notification, in addition to the display of the setting change notification screen and the output of the setting change notification sound, or in place of part or all, the lighting member of part or all of the game effect lamp 9, or the game effect lamp 9 An optional light-emitting member, such as a notification lamp provided separately from, may be controlled to emit light in a predetermined setting change notification mode. In the setting confirmation notification, in addition to the display of the setting confirmation notification screen and the output of the setting confirmation notification sound, or instead of part or all of the game effect lamp 9, part of the game effect lamp 9 is displayed. Alternatively, all the light emitting members or arbitrary light emitting members such as a notification lamp provided separately from the game effect lamp 9 may be controlled to emit light in a predetermined setting confirmation notification mode. In this way, the setting change notification may be made by using an arbitrary effect device or a notification device different from the effect device so as to notify that the setting value can be changed. The setting confirmation notification may be made by using an arbitrary effect device or a notification device different from the effect device so as to notify that the setting value can be confirmed. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the form in which the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification are performed, and one or both of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification may not be performed.

The command 93XXH, which is the setting change end command, and the setting confirmation end command, 9401H, are not limited to the form in which a common setting end command is used as the setting change end command and the setting confirmation end command. It may be something that can be obtained. In this case, in the power-on command processing, it is determined in step AKS027 to end the setting change when the setting end command is received, and in step AKS033, the setting confirmation ends when the setting end command is received. Then you can judge.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 71AK)
FIG. 8-33 shows a configuration example of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 in relation to the characterizing portion 71AK of this embodiment. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be provided at the upper right portion of the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 . The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 can be operated from the outside through an opening formed in a substrate case that accommodates the effect control substrate 12 . The output amount selector switch 71AK001 may be a rotary switch capable of detecting a predetermined operation such as a switch switching operation for initializing a predetermined effect output. The effect output initially set by the output amount selector switch 71AK001 should include at least the volume of the speakers 8L and 8R. Also, the amount of light emitted by a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may be included. For example, when a game arcade attendant opens the game machine frame 3, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 becomes operable. As described above, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is a condition that the initial setting of the effect output can be changed by opening the game machine frame 3 . The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 initially sets the effect output to one of a plurality of stages. In addition, depending on the switch position of the output amount selector switch 71AK001, it is possible to switch whether to permit or prohibit the change adjustment of the effect output by the player using the stick controller 31A or the like. The effect control CPU 120 may store such data indicating the setting of the effect output in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 as output setting information.

As shown in FIG. 8-33(B), the output amount selector switch 71AK001 has a total of 16 channels from "0" to "F". Corresponding switch positions can be toggled. In this embodiment, the volume is initially set to one of six levels according to which of the switch positions of the output amount selector switch 71AK001 is "0" to "F", and the volume can be adjusted by the player. Toggle whether to allow or not. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is connected directly or through a predetermined circuit to the effect control CPU 120, and a changeover switch signal indicating the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is input to the effect control CPU 120 to correspond to the channel. A switch position can be specified.

FIG. 8-34 shows an initial setting control 71AKC01 such as effect output according to the switch position of the output amount selector switch 71AK001. In this initial setting control 71AKC01, for example, when the switch position of the output amount selector switch 71AK001 is "5", the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is adjusted according to "volume 6 (maximum)". The upper limit volume is initially set to "97.0", and the volume setting (adjustment) by the player is enabled (permitted). In addition, it is not limited to the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the output amount of any effect device, such as the light amount of the game effect lamp 9, may be initially set according to the switch position of the output amount selector switch 71AK001. . When the switch position of the output amount selector switch 71AK001 is any one of "6" to "F", the volume setting (adjustment) by the player is disabled (prohibited), so the initially set effect output is used. is executed. In addition, corresponding to the case where the switch position of the output amount selector switch 71AK001 is "F", the effect display device 5 can display a setting screen such as a power saving function. The RTC 126 can set (change) a value indicating the current date and time.

Thus, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is provided in the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted, receives the operation related to adjustment of the effect output by the knob 71AK002, and switches the switch position based on the detection of the operation. , it is possible to control the output amount of the effect to any one of a plurality of stages. In the effect control CPU 120, processing for controlling the output amount of the effect to any one of a plurality of stages is executed based on the switch signal that can specify the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001.

FIG. 8-35 shows an execution example of setting change notification, setting confirmation notification, and initialization notification regarding the characteristic portion 71AK. In this execution example, as shown in FIG. 8-35(A), as the setting change notification, a setting change notification screen 71AKD01 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and a setting change notification sound 71AKE01 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. . As the setting confirmation notification, a setting confirmation notification screen 71AKD02 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and a setting confirmation notification sound 71AKE02 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, as shown in FIG. 8-35(B). As the initialization notification, as shown in FIG. 8-35(C), an initialization notification screen 71AKD03 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and an initialization notification sound 71AKE03 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In the characteristic portion 71AK, similarly to the above-described embodiment, the power-on command processing is executed at step AKS012 of the effect control main processing. In this power-on command process, the setting change notification is started by the control in step AKS026, and the setting change notification is finished by the control in step AKS028. Also, the setting confirmation notification is started by the control in step AKS032, and the setting confirmation notification is finished by the control in step AKS034. Furthermore, under the control of step AKS030, the initialization notification is started with the start of the initialization notification period, and the initialization notification is terminated with the end of the initialization notification period. Note that the setting change notification screen 71AKD01, the setting confirmation notification screen 71AKD02, and the initialization notification screen 71AKD03 are not limited to being displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 5, and are part of the display area of the effect display device 5. It may be a mode displayed in .

The characteristic portion 71AK is configured with an output amount selector switch 71AK001, and can be initialized to set the effect output such as volume to one of a plurality of stages corresponding to the switch position of the output amount selector switch 71AK001. On the other hand, the sound output in the setting change notification, setting confirmation notification, and initialization notification is the maximum volume that can be output in the pachinko game machine 1 regardless of the initial setting of the volume corresponding to the switch position of the output amount selector switch 71AK001. It is sufficient to output at a certain "volume 6 (maximum)" (upper limit volume "97.0"). For example, in the setting change notification, a setting change notification voice 71AKE01 that announces the message "setting is being changed" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume. In the setting confirmation notification, a setting confirmation notification voice 71AKE02 that announces the message "Setting confirmation is in progress" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume. In the initialization notification, an initialization notification voice 71AKE03 announcing the message "initialized" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume.

In this way, according to the operation of switching the switch position of the output amount selector switch 71AK001, the operation related to the adjustment of the effect output is detected, and based on the detection, the output amount of the effect is controlled to one of a plurality of stages, In the setting change notification, which is a notification regarding the change of the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, as the output of the setting change notification sound 71AKE01, the notification is performed with the maximum volume that is the common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation related to the adjustment of the effect output. . In the setting confirmation notification and the initialization notification, the setting confirmation notification sound 71AKE02 and the initialization notification sound 71AKE03 may be output with the maximum volume, which is a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation related to the adjustment of the effect output. In this way, since the notification is given by the common output amount, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts caused by changing or confirming the set value and initializing (clearing) the contents stored in the RAM 102 .

FIG. 8-36 shows a display example when player volume adjustment, power saving function setting, etc. are performed with respect to the characteristic portion 71AK. For example, when the switch position of the output amount selector switch 71AK001 is "0" and the effect output is not yet adjusted by the player, the volume setting is "volume 1 (minimum)". FIG. 8-36(A) shows a player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 displayed on the effect display device 5 corresponding to this case. The player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 includes an effect image showing six memories corresponding to six levels of volume, and the display color of each memory is changed according to the current volume. For example, when the volume setting is "volume 1 (minimum)", one memory is displayed in the first display color (e.g. red), while the remaining five memories are displayed in the second display color (e.g. white). . At this time, in response to detection of the operation of tilting the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A to the right, the volume setting is changed to "volume 2", and the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 changes to the first volume. Increase the display color memory by one. In this way, each time the first action of tilting the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A in the first direction (rightward direction, etc.) is detected, a plurality of stages of effects are performed until the setting of the effect output reaches the maximum. The output amount may be changed to increase by one step. On the other hand, each time the second motion of tilting the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A in the second direction (leftward) is detected, the effect output amount is increased in multiple steps until the effect output setting reaches the minimum. It may be changed to decrease by one step.

When the switch position of the output amount selector switch 71AK001 is "F", the power saving function and the value of the RTC 126 can be set. FIG. 8-36(B) shows a power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 displayed on the effect display device 5 corresponding to this case. The power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 includes a display area for setting the power saving function and a display area for setting the value of the current date and time (current time) by the RTC 126 . When the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 is displayed, the existence and type of power saving function (power saving mode), Then, the RTC 126 sets (changes) the value indicating the current date and time. In the effect control CPU 120, processing for setting (changing) the power saving function and the like is executed based on the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 and the detection of the operation to change each setting. For example, when the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 is set to select "power saving mode A", the power saving function is activated only during the customer waiting demonstration in which the demonstration screen is displayed. Anything that can be done is fine. In addition, when it is set to select the "power saving mode B" in the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12, the brightness of the game effect lamp 9, for example, is displayed during the variable display in addition to the customer waiting demonstration. Any control may be performed as long as the control for activating the power saving function is performed, such as reducing the amount of light emitted.

FIG. 8-37 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 regarding the characteristic portion 71AK. This effect control main process may be executed instead of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of the characterizing portion 71AK, the effect control CPU 120 performs the initialization process (step 71AKS011) and the power-on command process (step 71AKS012) as in the above embodiment. The initialization process of step 71AKS011 corresponds to the initialization process of step AKS011 in the above embodiment, and the power-on command process of step 71AKS012 corresponds to the power-on process of step AKS012 in the above embodiment. If it is After executing the power-on command process in step 71AKS012, unlike the above embodiment, the start-up output switching process (step AKS013) is executed. After that, as in the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step 71AKS014). and wait. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt flag is ON (step 71AKS014; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step 71AKS015), command analysis processing (step 71AKS016), effect control process processing. (Step 71AKS017) and effect random number update processing (Step 71AKS018) are executed in order. Furthermore, in the effect control main process of the characteristic part 71AK, after executing the output change process during progress (step 71AKS019), the process returns to step 71AKS014.

FIG. 8-38 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 71AKS013 as the start output switching process. In the output switching process at the start, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the switch position based on the changeover switch signal from the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS031). At this time, it is determined whether or not the identified switch position is "F" (step 71AKS032). Then, when the switch position is other than "F" (step 71AKS032; No), control is performed to switch the initial setting of the output amount by adjusting the effect output according to the switch position (step 71AKS033), and output at the start End the switching process. In step 71AKS033, the initial output setting data indicating the position of the switch corresponding to the channel can be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, for example.

If it is determined at step 71AKS032 that the switch position is "F" (step 71AKS032; Yes), control is performed to start setting the power saving function (step 71AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may control the effect display device 5 to display the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting of the power saving function. After the control for setting the power saving function is started in this manner, it is determined whether or not the setting is completed (step 71AKS035). In step 71AKS035, if the selection of the item indicating "end" is confirmed on the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12, it may be determined that the setting has been completed. If this setting has not been completed (step 71AKS035; No), control corresponding to the setting of the power saving function, etc. is performed (step 71AKS036), and the process returns to step 71AKS035. In step 71AKS036, it is possible to change the display on the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 in accordance with detection of an operation of tilting the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A or detection of an operation of pressing down the push button 31B. You can control like this.

If it is determined at step 71AKS035 that the setting has been completed (step 71AKS035; Yes), control is performed to finish setting the power saving function (step 71AKS037), and the output switching process at the start is finished. At step 71AKS037, for example, the effect control CPU 120 stores, in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, power saving function data indicating whether or not there is a power saving function and the type (power saving mode). Also, when a setting is made to change the value of the RTC 126 , data indicating the changed value is set in the RTC 126 .

FIG. 8-39 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 71AKS019 as the ongoing output change process. In the ongoing output change process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the switching permission condition is satisfied (step 71AKS051). The switching permission condition may be determined in advance as a condition for permitting the adjustment of the effect output using the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 during execution of the effect control accompanying the progress of the game control in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the switching permission condition may be established when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. When such a switching permitting condition is satisfied (step 71AKS051; Yes), the switch position is detected based on the changeover switch signal from the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS052). Based on this detection result, it is determined whether or not the switch position has been changed (step 71AKS053). For example, the effect control CPU 120 compares the switch position indicated by the initial output setting data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 with the switch position specified from the changeover switch signal, and if the comparison results do not match , it may be determined that the switch position has been changed.

If it is determined in step 71AKS053 that the switch position has been changed (step 71AKS053; Yes), it is determined whether or not the switch position after change is "F" (step 71AKS054). At this time, if the switch position is other than "F" (step 71AKS054; No), control is performed to switch the initial setting of the output amount by adjusting the effect output according to the switch position (step 71AKS055). At step 71AKS055, for example, initial output setting data indicating switch positions corresponding to channels can be stored (updated) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 .

If it is determined at step 71AKS054 that the switch position is "F" (step 71AKS054; Yes), control is performed to start setting the power saving function (step 71AKS056). In this case, step 71AKS034 of the output switching process at the start
to 71AKS037 may be executed. That is, it is determined whether or not the setting is completed (step 71AKS057), and if not completed (step 71AKS057; No), control corresponding to the setting of the power saving function, etc. is performed (step 71AKS058), and step 71AKS057 is executed. back to After that, when the setting is completed (step 71AKS057; Yes), control is performed to end the setting of the power saving function, etc. (step 71AKS058).

If the switching permission condition is not satisfied in step 71AKS051 (step 71AKS051; No), or if there is no switch position change in step 71AKS053 (step 71AKS053; After that, it is determined whether or not the player can adjust the volume, etc., based on the switch position of the output amount selector switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS060). In step 71AKS060, when the current switch position of the output amount selector switch 71AK001 is any one of "0" to "5", the volume setting (adjustment) by the player is possible (permitted). , it may be determined that the adjustment by the player is possible. If the adjustment by the player is not allowed (prohibited) (step 71AKS060; No), the ongoing output change process is terminated. It should be noted that the step 71AKS051 is not limited to determining whether or not the switching permission condition is satisfied, and the detection of the switch position may be performed in the step 71AKS052 without performing the determination in the step 71AKS051.

If it is determined at step 71AKS060 that adjustment by the player is possible (step 71AKS060; Yes), it is determined whether or not an action to change the output amount of the effect has been detected (step 71AKS061). In step 71AKS061, for example, when the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 is being displayed, based on the detection result of the operation of operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, the detection of the operation of changing the effect output amount in multiple stages is performed. It should be determined whether or not there is. If no such action is detected (step 71AKS061; No), the ongoing output change process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that motion has been detected (step 71AKS061; Yes), control is performed to adjust the output amount according to the detection result (step 71AKS062), and the ongoing output change process ends. In step 71AKS062, when the action of pressing the push button 31B is detected on the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11, updated output setting data indicating the volume setting after change is stored (updated) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Let it be.

(Description of Modified Example of Characteristic Portion 71AK)
FIG. 8-40 shows the priority of control with respect to notification, screen display, etc. by effect control in a modified example of the characteristic portion 71AK. In the pachinko game machine 1, when the power supply is started by turning on the power and the setting change state is controlled, the pachinko game machine 1 enters a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation state is controlled with the start of power supply by turning on the power, the game may be controlled so as not to be in the game stop state. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the game stop state start time processing in step AKS031 of the power-on command processing, and when it is in the setting confirmation state, for example, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 The input of a changeover switch signal that can specify the switch position may be enabled. In this case, the priority 71AKP11 of the setting change notification is the highest priority among the priorities related to the effect control, and is higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the setting screen such as the power saving function. On the other hand, the priority 71AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification is lower than the priority 71AKP12 of the setting screen such as the power saving function. Since the priority 71AKP1Z of the normal game screen corresponding to the progress of the game in the normal time is the lowest priority among the priorities related to the effect control, the priority AKP11 of the setting change notification
AKP12 of the setting screen for power saving function, etc., and the priority AKP13 of setting confirmation notification.

As described above, the priority 71AKP11 of the setting change notification is higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen, etc. Therefore, when the control to start the setting change notification is performed by step AKS026 of the power-on command processing, Even if the switch position of the output amount selector switch 71AK001 is switched to the specific position of "F" before the setting change is completed, regardless of the detection of the switching operation of the output amount selector switch 71AK001. First, the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 does not start to be displayed. On the other hand, since the priority 71AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification is lower than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen, etc., when the control to start the setting confirmation notification is performed by step AKS032 of the power-on command processing, When the switch position of the output amount selector switch 71AK001 is switched to the specific position of "F" before the end of the setting confirmation, power saving is performed based on the detection of the switch position of the output amount selector switch 71AK001. The display of the function setting screen 71AKD12 may be started. In this way, control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of effect may not be executed when changing the setting value, while control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of effect may be executed when confirming the setting value. . As a result, it is possible to check the set value and appropriately control the stage of the output amount of the effect when preventing the work of changing the set value from being hindered.

By executing the command process at power-on in step 71AKS012 and then executing the output switching process at start in step 71AKS013, it is possible to detect the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount selector switch 71AK001 in the setting change state. Regardless, it is not limited to a mode in which the control of the output amount of the effect is not executed, and whether or not an operation to change the switch position of the output amount selector switch 71AK001 is detected in command processing at power-on. When the operation is detected, the information indicating the switch position can be stored, and after the setting change state is completed, the control of the output amount of the performance is executed based on the stored information. It may be something to do. For example, in the power-on command processing of the above-described embodiment, if it is determined in step AKS027 that the setting change has not ended, the switch position is specified based on the changeover switch signal from the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. At this time, information indicating the result of specifying the switch position is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 . After that, in step 71AKS031 of the start output switching process, the switch position of the output amount selector switch 71AK001 may be specified based on the information indicating the result of specifying the switch position. Also in this case, when it is in the setting change state, it is possible to restrict the performance output amount control not to be executed regardless of the detection of the operation to change the switch position of the output amount selector switch 71AK001.

Alternatively, in the setting change state, it is determined whether or not the switch position of the output amount selector switch 71AK001 is at a specific switch position, for example, whether or not the switch position is "F". Alternatively, the control of displaying the setting change notification screen 71AKD01 on the effect display device 5 may be given priority over the control of displaying the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 on the effect display device 5 . In this case, when the setting change notification is completed by the control in step AKS028 of the power-on command processing, the control for displaying the setting change notification screen 71AKD01 on the effect display device 5, which has been given priority, is also terminated. It is sufficient if the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 can be started to be displayed on the display device 5 .

Unlike the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, a detection device capable of detecting the action of a predetermined operation by the player is provided, and based on the detection of the action by this detection device, the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed. good too. For example, together with or in place of the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001, a setting value change switch capable of detecting the player's operation such as a switching operation or a pressing operation is provided, and the player's operation is detected by the setting value change switch. , the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 may be changed in the same manner as when the operation is detected by the clear switch AK001.

As described above, in the effect control main process of the characterizing portion 71AK, after executing the power-on command process in step 71AKS012 in the same manner as in the above embodiment, the starting output switching process is executed in step 71AKS013. In the power-on command process, for example, in step AKS025 or step AKS031, the game stop state start process is executed. After the game stop state start processing is executed, the reception of a command different from the setting change end command or the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and the normal performance control is regulated so as not to be executed. In this case, the input of the changeover switch signal that can specify the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is also disabled, so that the adjustment of the effect output according to the switch position and the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 are not performed. , the control based on the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount selector switch 71AK001 is restricted (prohibited). In this way, when the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state that permits the change of the setting value with the start of power supply by power-on, regardless of the detection of the operation related to the adjustment of the output amount of the effect, the effect Execution of control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of is restricted (prohibited). As a result, the control for changing the setting value is prioritized over the control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of the effect, so that it is possible to prevent the work of changing the setting value from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set value.

The effect control CPU 120 controls execution of effects according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . The effect control CPU 120 is provided on the effect control board. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is provided in the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted, and accepts the operation related to the adjustment of the output amount of the effect by the knob 71AK002. As a result, the initial setting of the output amount of the effect can be appropriately switched in order to prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set value.

In the effect control main process of the characteristic portion 71AK, after executing the power-on command process in step 71AKS012, the start output switching process is executed in step 71AKS013. In the output switching process at the start of step 71AKS013, at step 71AKS033, control is performed to switch the initial setting of the effect output according to the switch position, or at steps 71AKS034 to 71AKS037, control is performed to set the power saving function. In this way, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of power supply, if an operation to change the switch position of the output amount selector switch 71AK001 is detected before the setting change state ends, After the setting change state is completed, the output amount of the effect is controlled in stages based on the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount selector switch 71AK001. As a result, the initial setting of the output amount of the effect can be appropriately switched in order to prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set value.

When the setting change notification is performed by the display screen of the effect display device 5 or the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 is generated regardless of the initial setting of the volume corresponding to the switch position of the output amount selector switch 71AK001. , is output at the maximum volume that can be output in the pachinko game machine 1 . In this way, by notifying with the common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation to change the switch position of the output amount selector switch 71AK001, it is possible to prevent the work of changing the setting value from being disturbed. can also be prevented from occurring. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set value.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 71AK)
Regarding the characteristic part 71AK, conventionally, there is a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings with different degrees of advantage for the player, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In addition, as a game machine capable of changing settings related to effects, there is one described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-29614, for example. However, the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2015-29614 do not take into consideration the control when changing the setting of the effect while changing a plurality of settings with different degrees of advantage. rice field. As a result, there is a possibility that the operation of changing to a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a game machine of the means 1 related to the characteristic part 71AK for providing a game machine that can prevent troubles in changing the setting value,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state, etc.) that is advantageous to a player by performing a game,
setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process of step Sa13) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3);
game control means (for example, CPU 103 for executing special symbol process processing in step S25, etc.) capable of progressing the game so that the degree of advantage for the player differs based on the set value;
setting control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the setting value to be changed by the setting means when power supply is started;
Effect adjustment detection means (for example, output amount changeover switch 71AK001, etc.) capable of detecting an operation related to adjustment of the output amount of effect,
Output amount control means for controlling the output amount of the effect to any of a plurality of stages based on the detection of the action by the effect adjustment detection means (for example, output switching processing at the start of step 71AKS013 and output change processing during progress of step 71AKS019) Production control CPU 120 etc.) to be executed,
Limiting means for limiting the execution of control by the output amount control means (for example, step AKS012 as power-on command processing in step 71AKS012) regardless of detection of operation by the effect adjustment detection means when the change permission state is established. Effect control CPU 120 etc. for executing processing) and
It may be a game machine characterized by
According to such a configuration, since execution of control by the output amount control means is restricted when in the change-permitted state, it is possible to prevent troubles in changing the set value.

As a game machine of means 2 related to the characteristic part 71AK,
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling the execution of production according to the progress of the game,
A production control board (for example, production control board 12, etc.) provided with the production control means,
The production control board further comprises a reception means (for example, a knob 71AK002 of an output amount changeover switch 71AK001) that receives an operation detectable by the production adjustment detection means,
The game machine of the means 1 related to the characterizing portion 71AK characterized by:
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately control the output amount of the effect and prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a game machine of means 3 related to the characteristic part 71AK,
When an operation is detected by the effect adjustment detection means before the change permission state ends, the output amount control means causes the effect adjustment detection means to operate after the change permission state ends. (For example, step 71A
execution of start-time output switching processing in KS013, etc.),
It may be a game machine of means 1 or means 2 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK characterized by:
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately control the stage of the output amount of the effect and prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a game machine of means 4 related to the characteristic part 71AK,
Equipped with initialization detection means (for example, clear switch AK001, etc.) capable of detecting actions related to initialization of the game machine, unlike actions by the player during the game,
In the change permission state, the setting value set by the setting means can be changed according to the detection of the operation by the detection means for initialization (for example, when a clear switch AK001 is used instead of the setting switch 52). ),
Any one of the means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK characterized by the above may be used.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent troubles in changing the set value without providing a separate configuration for changing the set value.

As a game machine of means 5 related to the characteristic part 71AK,
Change notification means (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) for notifying about changes in setting values by the setting means,
The change notification means performs notification with a common output amount (for example, output of setting change notification sound 71AKE01) regardless of detection of operation by the effect adjustment detection means.
Any one of the means 1 to 4 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK characterized by the following may be used.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent troubles in changing the setting value while preventing the setting value from being changed by an illegal act.

As a game machine of means 6 related to the characteristic part 71AK,
A setting confirmation control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the setting confirmation process of step AKS002) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set by the setting means,
The output amount control means is
When it is in the setting confirmation state, it is possible to control the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation by the detection means for adjusting the effect (for example, the power saving function setting screen higher than the setting confirmation notification priority 71AKP13 priority 71AKP12, etc.),
When it is in the change permission state, the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detection means is not controlled (for example, the priority of the setting change notification higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the setting screen such as the power saving function 71AKP11, etc.),
Any one of the means 1 to 5 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK characterized by:
In such a configuration, while it is possible to control the stage of the output amount of the effect while confirming the set value, since the stage of the output amount of the effect is not controlled when changing the set value, it is possible to change the set value. It is possible to prevent troubles from occurring.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 72AK)
FIG. 8-41 shows an example of a power-up operation performed by a movable member driven by motion motors AK011-AK014. The movable members driven by the motion motors AK011 to AK014 include a first movable member serving as a first movable effect device and a second movable member serving as a second movable effect device. The first movable member stops at the lower left position of the effect display device 5 as the origin position (retracted position). It rises obliquely upward to the right from the retracted position, stops at the advanced position overlapped on the front side of the display screen of the performance display device 5, and then returns to the retracted position again. The first movable member includes a rotation mechanism, first to third split pieces, and a slide mechanism. First to third split pieces are provided at the tip of the rotating mechanism. The first to third split pieces form a predetermined figure at the origin position when they are in the combined closed state. The rotation mechanism of the first movable member is rotated from the retracted position, which is the origin position, to the advanced position at the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5 by the operating motor AK011. As a result, after the first movable member advances to the central portion of the display screen of the effect display device 5, the first to third split pieces are split by the operating motor AK012, resulting in an open state. On the other hand, when the first movable member is at the origin position, the first to third split pieces cannot be opened. The slide mechanism of the first movable member is laterally slid by the operation motor AK013 after the rotation mechanism of the first movable member and the first to third split pieces are rotated to the advanced positions. The sliding mechanism of the first movable member is set to the origin position when the first movable member is at the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5, and the rotation mechanism and the first to third split pieces are moved to the left side of the effect display device 5. It is sufficient if it can be slid between the position and the right side position.

The second movable member stops at a position above the effect display device 5 as an origin position (retracted position). After descending from the retracted position and stopping at the advanced position overlapped on the front side of the display screen of the performance display device 5, an action performance of returning to the retracted position is performed. The second movable member is lowered from the retracted position, which is the origin position, to an advanced position slightly above the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5 by the operating motor AK014, and then raised from the advanced position to the retracted position. In this way, the second movable member performs an effect motion of simply reciprocating up and down by the driving force of the motion motor AK014.

The origin position of the turning mechanism for the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK021. The origin positions of the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are detected by the origin sensor AK022. The origin position of the slide mechanism of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK023. The origin position of the second movable member is detected by an origin sensor AK024. The operating motor AK011 provides a driving force that allows the rotating mechanism of the first movable member to move between the origin position and the advanced position. The operating motor AK012 provides a driving force that allows the first to third split pieces of the first movable member to move between the closed state and the open state of the origin position. The operating motor AK013 provides a driving force that allows the slide mechanism of the first movable member to move between the origin position and the left or right position of the effect display device 5 . The operating motor AK014 provides a driving force that allows the second movable member to move between the origin position and the advanced position.

Power-on actions by the first movable member and the second movable member include a long initial action and a short initial action. The long initial action is an initial action that performs the same action as a normal effect action during the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game. By executing the long initial motion, it is possible to confirm whether or not a problem occurs in the normal performance motion. The short initial motion is a motion that omits a part of the normal performance motion, and is a return motion for returning the first movable member and the second movable member to the origin position.

When the long initial operation is executed as the power-on operation, first, as indicated by the solid-line arrow 72KM01, the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is moved to the origin position (retracted position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. , to the overlapping position on the front side of the central portion of the display screen of the effect display device 5, which is the advanced position. Subsequently, as indicated by the dashed arrow 72AKM02, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved from the closed state at the origin position to the open state by the driving force of the operating motor AK012. After that, as indicated by the dashed arrow 72AKM03, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved from the open state to the closed state (origin position) by the driving force of the operating motor AK012. Next, as indicated by solid line arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06, the slide mechanism of the first movable member is moved from the home position to the movable position in the right direction by the driving force of the operating motor AK013, and then to the movable position in the left direction. After that, return to the origin position. Then, as indicated by the solid line arrow 72AKM07, the rotating mechanism of the first movable member is returned from the advanced position to the origin position (retracted position) by the driving force of the operating motor AK011. Thereafter, as indicated by dashed arrows 72AKM08 and 72AKM09, the second movable member is moved from the origin position (retracted position) to the advanced position by the driving force of the operating motor AK014, and then returned to the origin position (retracted position).

When the short initial operation is performed as the power-on operation, the operation may be performed by omitting part of the long initial operation. For example, among the operations indicated by arrows 72AKM01 to 72AKM09, control is performed to execute the operations indicated by dashed arrows 72AKM02, 72AKM03, 72AKM08, and 72AKM09. In this case, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member cannot be moved from the closed state to the open state unless the rotating mechanism of the first movable member moves to the advanced position. Therefore, even in the short initial operation, operations indicated by solid line arrows 72AKM01 and 72AKM07 are required. In addition, in the long initial motion, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member and the second movable member are moved so that the amount of movement is greater than that indicated by the dashed arrows 72AKM02, 72AKM03, 72AKM08, and 72AKM09. may be done. In the short initial motion, the slide mechanism of the first movable member may be moved so that the amount of movement is smaller than the motion indicated by the solid line arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06.

In the short initial operation, at least part of the operation may be omitted or added according to the detection results of the origin sensors AK021-AK024. For example, when the origin sensor AK022 is off and the other origin sensors are on, the operation of moving the first to third split pieces of the first movable member to the closed state, which is the origin position, is indicated by the dashed arrow 72AKM03. The operating motor AK012 is driven so as to move in the direction. Then, when the origin sensor AK022 is turned on, the operation motor AK012 should be stopped. After that, by moving the rotation mechanism of the first movable member so as to be smaller than the amount of movement indicated by the solid-line arrows 72AKM01 and 72AKM07, the origin sensor AK021 is temporarily turned off and then turned on. Motor AK021 is driven. The second movable member is moved as indicated by dashed arrows 72AKM08 and 72AKM09 to drive the operating motor AK024 so that the origin sensor AK024 is temporarily turned off and then turned on.

FIG. 8-42 shows the control patterns used to drive the movable members by the motion motors AK011-AK014. Pattern data constituting these control patterns may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 . In this embodiment, a short initial control pattern 72AKP01, a long initial control pattern 72AKP02, an effect operation A control pattern 72AKP11, and an effect operation B control pattern 72AKP12 are prepared in advance as control patterns for the movable members.

A short initial control pattern 72AKP01 is a control pattern used to execute a short initial operation. Long initial control pattern AKP02 is a control pattern used to execute a long initial operation. The production operation A control pattern 72AKP11 is a control pattern used for executing the operation of the movable member included in the first production, such as the ready-to-win production, which is executed as the game progresses. The performance operation B control pattern 72AKP12 is a control pattern used for executing the motion of the movable member included in the second performance, which is different from the first performance executed with the progress of the game, such as the advance notice performance. . As for the control patterns for the movable member, more control patterns may be prepared, or a part of the control patterns may be prepared. The effect control CPU 120 may determine the drive contents of the motion motors AK011 to AK014 based on the pattern data read from the ROM 121, and control the motion of the movable members.

FIG. 8-43 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on command processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 regarding the characterizing portion 72AK of this embodiment. This power-on command process may be executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 72AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines the received command from the main substrate 11 in the same manner as in the above embodiment (steps 72AKS001 to 72AKS004). When it is determined that the received command is a setting change start command at step 72AKS003 (step 72AKS003; Yes), as in the above embodiment, the game stop state start processing is executed (step 72AKS005), and the setting is changed. Control to start notification is performed (step 72AKS006).

After the control at step 72AKS006 is performed, unlike the above-described embodiment, control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS007). For example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the pattern data of the short initial control pattern 72AKP01 from a predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes motion control of the movable member by the motion motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By executing the control in step 72AKS007, it is possible to perform control for executing the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position when the setting change state is the change permission state. Also in the period after step 72AKS008, the control in step 72AKS007 may be continuously executed until the short initial operation period ends, and the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed.

After the control at step 72AKS007, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step 72AKS008), as in the above embodiment. If the setting change is not to be finished (step 72AKS008; No), step 72AKS008 is repeatedly executed to wait. When it is determined at step 72AKS008 that the setting change is finished (step 72AKS008; Yes), control is performed to finish notification of the setting change (step 72AKS009), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 72AKS010).

After executing the game stop state end processing at step 72AKS010, unlike the above-described embodiment, control is executed to execute a long initial action (step 72AKS011), and the process proceeds to step 72AKS014. In step 72AKS011, for example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the pattern data of the long initial control pattern 72AKP02 from a predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes motion control of the movable members by the motion motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By executing the control in step 72AKS011, after the setting change state as the change permission state ends, control can be performed to execute the long initial motion, which is the initial motion of the movable member. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS011, the long initial operation as the initial operation is executed following the short initial operation as the return operation in the setting change state as the change permission state. You can choose not to control. Even after proceeding to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS011 may be continuously executed until the end of the long initial operation period, and the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed.

If it is determined at step 72AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command (step 72AKS001; Yes), control is performed to execute a short initial operation (step 72AKS012), followed by control to execute a long initial operation. (step 72AKS013). In step 72AKS013, after the short initial operation by the control in step 72AKS012 is finished, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started. By executing the control in steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013, when the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, the short initial operation as the return operation is followed by the long initial operation as the initial operation. Controls can be exercised to perform actions. Even after proceeding to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS013 may continue to be executed until the long initial operation period ends, and the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed. The control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by common processing using common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by different processes while using common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

After that, control for executing initialization notification is performed (step 72AKS014). It should be noted that the control for executing the long initial operation may be executed after the control for executing the initialization notification is executed. If it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command, the initialization notification may be executed before the short initial operation is executed in step 72AKS012. .

When it is determined that the received command is a setting confirmation start command at step 72AKS004 (step 72AKS004; Yes), as in the above embodiment, the game stop state start time processing is executed (step 72AKS015), and setting confirmation is performed. Control to start notification is performed (step 72AKS016). Subsequently, unlike the above embodiment, control is performed to execute a short initial operation (step 72AKS017). By executing the control in step 72AKS017, when it is in the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the control to execute the return operation to return the movable member to the origin position. It can be performed. Also in the period after step 72AKS018, the control in step 72AKS017 may be continuously executed until the short initial operation period ends, and the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed.

After the control at step 72AKS017, it is determined whether or not to end the setting confirmation (step 72AKS018), as in the above embodiment. If the setting confirmation is not finished (step 72AKS018; No), step 72AKS018 is repeatedly executed and waits. When it is determined at step 72AKS018 that the setting confirmation is finished (step 72AKS018; Yes), control is performed to finish the setting confirmation notification (step 72AKS019), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 72AKS020).

After executing the game stop state end processing in step 72AKS020, unlike the above-described embodiment, control is executed to execute a long initial operation (step 72AKS021), and the power-on command processing ends. By executing the control in step 72AKS021, after the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is finished, the long initial operation, which is the initial operation of the movable member, is executed. can be controlled. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS021, in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value, the short initial operation as the return operation is followed by the long initial operation as the initial operation. You can choose not to control the execution of Even after the power-on command processing ends, the control in step 72AKS021 may continue to be executed until the long initial operation period ends, and control to execute the long initial operation may be performed.

When it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the received command is a power failure recovery designation command (step 72AKS002; Yes), control is performed to execute a short initial operation (step 72AKS022), followed by control to execute a long initial operation. (step 72AKS023), the power-on command processing is terminated. At step 72AKS023, after the short initial operation by the control at step 72AKS022 is completed, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started. By executing the control in steps 72AKS022 and 72AKS023, when the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, the short initial operation as the recovery operation is followed by the long initial operation as the initial operation. Controls can be exercised to perform actions. Even after the power-on command processing ends, the control in step 72AKS023 may continue to be executed until the long initial operation period ends, and control to execute the long initial operation may be performed. The control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by common processing using common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

(Description of Modified Example of Characteristic Portion 72AK)
FIG. 8-44 is a flow chart showing an example of power-on command processing executed in the modified example of the characterizing portion 72AK. In the power-on command processing in this modification, when it is determined that the received command is a RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001 (step 72AKS001; Yes), the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS010. After that, the control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS031), followed by the control for executing the long initial operation (step 72AKS032), and then the process proceeds to step 72AKS014, where the control for performing the initialization notification is performed. If it is determined that the received command is a RAM clear notification command at step 72AKS001, with the start of power supply by turning on the power, the memory content in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized (cleared). Correspondingly, initialization notification is executed by executing the control in step 72AKS014. When this initialization notification is executed, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is executed, so that it is possible to perform control to execute a long initial operation as an initial operation following a short initial operation as a return operation. . Further, even after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS010, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is executed, so that after the setting change state as the change permission state is ended, the short circuit that becomes the return operation is executed. Following the initial operation, control can be performed to execute a long initial operation, which is the initial operation. In this way, when it is determined that the received command is the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001 and after executing the game stop state end processing in step 72AKS010, the common control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 , the short initial operation is followed by the long initial operation.

In the power-on command processing in this modification, when it is determined that the received command is a power failure recovery designation command in step 72AKS002 (step 72AKS002; Yes), the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS020. After that, control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 72AKS033), followed by control to execute the long initial operation (step 72AKS034), and then the power-on command processing is terminated. When it is determined that the received command is a power failure recovery designation command at step 72AKS002, the memory content in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is restored to the memory content at the time of the power failure with the start of power supply by turning on the power. . When such power failure recovery is performed, steps 72AKS033, 72A
By executing the control in KS034, it is possible to perform control to execute the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, following the short initial operation, which is the return operation. In addition, even after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS020, the control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is executed to confirm the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. After the state ends, control can be performed to execute a long initial operation, which is an initial operation, following a short initial operation, which is a return operation. In this way, when it is determined that the received command is a power failure recovery notification command in step 72AKS002, and after executing the game stop state end processing in step 72AKS020, the control in common steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 , the short initial operation is followed by the long initial operation.

The short initial operation and the long initial operation may be controlled to be executed when the initialization notification is performed, or may be controlled to be executed even if the initialization notification is not performed. Further, the short initial operation and the long initial operation may be controlled to be executed in response to power failure restoration notification, or may be controlled to be executed even if power failure restoration notification is not performed. Further, after the start of the control for executing the effect accompanying the progress of the game, the control for executing the short initial action may be performed based on the establishment of the return action condition. After the control for executing the effect accompanying the progress of the game is started, the control for executing the long initial action may be performed based on the establishment of the initial action condition.

The configuration of the movable member is not limited to a form including the first movable member and the second movable member, and at least a short initial motion that is a return motion and a long initial motion that is an initial motion can be performed, In the production accompanying the progress of the game, it is sufficient if it can operate according to a predetermined operation mode. The short initial motion and the long initial motion may be arbitrarily specified according to the configuration of the movable member.

As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characterizing portion 72AK, at step 72AKS007, control is performed to execute the short initial operation. In this way, when the setting change state permitting the change of the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled in accordance with the start of power supply upon power-on, the movable members such as the first movable member and the second movable member are moved to the origin position. Control is performed to execute a return operation to return to the normal state. As a result, when the control for changing the set value is performed, the movable member is returned to the origin position, so that the work of changing the set value is not hindered by the movable member, and the work of changing the set value can be performed. It is possible to prevent troubles from occurring. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set value.

In the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 72AK, when it is determined that the received command is the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001, the control in steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013 is performed to perform the short initial operation which is the return operation. Subsequently, control for executing a long initial operation, which is an initial operation, is performed. On the other hand, when the short initial operation is executed by the control in step 72AKS007, the control for executing the long initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is finished. If the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, is executed in the setting change state, the execution of the setting change notification is hindered, and there is a possibility that appropriate notification cannot be performed. Therefore, the control for executing the long initial operation is performed after the setting change state ends, and the control for executing the long initial operation is not performed during the setting confirmation state. In this way, when the setting change state is the change permission state, the long initial motion, which is the initial motion of the movable member, is prevented from being executed so that the operation of changing the set value is not hindered. It is possible to prevent troubles from occurring in the work of changing values. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the setting value.

If it is determined at step 72AKS008 that the setting change is finished, at step 72AKS011 control is performed to execute a long initial operation. In this way, after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed, control is performed so that only the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, is executed. As a result, in the case of preventing troubles in the operation of changing the set value, unnecessary operation of the movable member can be prevented, and the control burden for operating the movable member can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the setting value.

In the power-on command processing in the modified example of the characteristic part 72AK, when it is determined that the received command is the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed to perform the return operation. Control is performed to execute a long initial operation, which is an initial operation, following the short initial operation. At this time, the control of step 72AKS014 is performed to perform the control of executing the initialization notification. In this way, when the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized by initializing (clearing) the stored content in the RAM 102 along with the start of power supply by turning on the power, the initialization notification is issued. When this initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute a long initial operation as an initial operation following a short initial operation as a return operation. Further, even when it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is finished, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed so that the short initial operation as the return operation is followed by the long initial operation as the initial operation. control. As a result, in order to prevent troubles in the work of changing the set value, it is possible to share the operation of the movable member and reduce the control load for operating the movable member. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the setting value.

In the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 72AK, in step AKS017, control is performed to execute a short initial operation. In this way, when the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled with the start of power supply by turning on the power, the movable members such as the first movable member and the second movable member are moved to the origin position. Control is performed to execute a return operation to return to the normal state. After that, when it is determined at step 72AKS018 that the setting confirmation is finished, at step 72AKS021, control is performed to execute a long initial operation. In this way, after the setting confirmation state is completed, the control for executing the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, is performed. If the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, is executed in the setting confirmation state, the execution of the setting confirmation notification is hindered, and there is a risk that appropriate notification cannot be performed. Therefore, the control for executing the long initial operation is performed after the setting confirmation state is completed, and the control for executing the long initial operation is not performed during the setting confirmation state. As a result, in order to prevent troubles in changing the setting value, the setting value can be easily confirmed by preventing the execution of the long initial operation, which is the initial operation by the movable member, in the setting confirmation state. make it Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the setting value.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 72AK)
Regarding the characteristic part 72AK, conventionally, there is a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings with different degrees of advantage for the player, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a game machine that returns a movable member to an origin position, there is one described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-221154, for example. However, the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2016-221154 do not take into consideration the case where the setting change conflicts with the operation of the movable member. As a result, there is a possibility that the operation of changing to a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player may be hindered. Therefore, the characteristic part 72A for providing a game machine capable of preventing troubles in the work of changing the setting value
As a game machine of means 1 related to K,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state, etc.) that is advantageous to a player by performing a game,
setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process of step Sa13) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3);
game control means (for example, CPU 103 for executing special symbol process processing in step S25, etc.) capable of progressing the game so that the degree of advantage for the player differs based on the set value;
a setting control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the processes of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the change of the setting value by the setting means with the start of power supply;
A movable member that can be moved according to the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member that is operated by operation motors AK011 to AK013, a second movable member that is operated by operation motor AK014, etc.);
A movable control means (for example, step Equipped with a production control CPU 120 etc.) that executes command processing at power-on of AKS012,
The movable control means performs control to execute the return operation when in the change permission state (for example, execution of step 72AKS007),
It may be a game machine characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the return operation of returning the movable member to the original position is executed in the change-permitted state, it is possible to prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a game machine of means 2 related to the characteristic part 72AK,
The movable control means is
When the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013),
When in the change permission state, control for executing the initial operation following the return operation is not performed (for example, execution of step 72AKS008);
The game machine of the means 1 related to the characterizing portion 72AK characterized by:
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the initial operation by the movable member from being performed when in the change-permitted state, thereby preventing the work of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a game machine of means 3 related to the characteristic part 72AK,
After the change permission state ends, the movable control means performs control to execute only the initial operation (for example, execution of step 72AKS011),
The gaming machine of means 2 relating to the characteristic part 72AK characterized by:
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent useless operation by the movable member and to prevent troubles in changing the set value.

As a game machine of means 4 related to the characteristic part 72AK,
When the game machine is initialized with the start of power supply, initialization notification means for executing initialization notification (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, effect control CPU 120 for executing step 72AKS014 etc.)
The movable control means is
When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS031 and 72AKS031 following the execution of step 72AKS014 are performed).
2AKS032 execution, etc.),
After the change permission state ends, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 following steps 72AKS005 to 72AKS010),
The game machine of means 2 related to the characteristic part 72AK characterized by:
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control burden by standardizing the operations of the movable members, and to prevent the work of changing the set values from being hindered.

As a game machine of means 5 related to the characteristic part 72AK,
A setting confirmation control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing the setting confirmation process of step AKS002, etc.) capable of controlling a setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set by the setting means,
The movable control means is
When it is in the setting confirmation state, control is performed to execute the return operation (for example, execution of step 72AKS017),
After the setting confirmation state is completed, control is performed to execute the initial operation (for example, execution of step 72AKS021),
Any one of the means 1 to 4 relating to the characterizing part 72AK characterized by:
In such a configuration, the setting value can be easily confirmed by preventing the initial operation by the movable member from being executed in the setting confirmation state, and the setting value changing operation can be prevented from being hindered.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 73AK)
FIG. 8-45 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on command processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 regarding the characterizing portion 73AK of this embodiment. This power-on command process may be executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the characteristic portion 73AK, the operation contents of the short initial motion and the long initial motion may be the same as those of the characteristic portion 72AK of the present embodiment. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 73AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines the received command from the main substrate 11 in the same manner as in the above embodiment (steps 73AKS001 to 73AKS004). When it is determined that the received command is a setting change start command at step 73AKS003 (step 73AKS003; Yes), as in the above embodiment, the game stop state starting process is executed (step 73AKS005), and the setting is changed. Control to start notification is performed (step 73AKS006).

After performing the control in step 73AKS006, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step 73AKS007). If the setting change is not to be completed (step 73AKS007; No), step 73AKS007 is repeatedly executed and waits. When it is determined at step 73AKS007 that the setting change is finished (step 73AKS007; Yes), control is performed to finish notification of the setting change (step 73AKS008), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 73AKS009). As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 73AK, when the setting change state is the change permission state, control for executing the short initial operation as the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is not performed. .

When it is determined that the received command is a RAM clear notification command in step 73AKS001 (step 73AKS001; Yes), and after executing the game stop state end processing in step 73AKS009, the control to execute the short initial operation is executed. (step 73AKS010), followed by control to execute a long initial operation (step 73AKS011). In step 73AKS011, after the short initial operation by the control in step 73AKS010 is completed, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started. By performing the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011, when the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, the short initial operation as the recovery operation is followed by the long initial operation as the initial operation. can be controlled to run Further, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of power supply, after the setting change state ends, control can be performed to execute the short initial operation which is the return operation. Alternatively, when the setting change state is set as the change permission state with the start of power supply, after the setting change state ends, the short initial operation as the return operation is followed by the long initial operation as the initial operation. Controls can be exercised to perform actions.

After that, control for executing initialization notification is performed (step 73AKS012). It should be noted that the control for executing the short initial operation or the long initial operation may be executed after the control for executing the initialization notification is executed. Alternatively, the control for performing the short initial operation may be performed first, then the control for performing the initialization notification may be performed, and then the control for performing the long initial operation may be performed.

When it is determined that the received command is a setting confirmation start command at step 73AKS004 (step 73AKS004; Yes), as in the above embodiment, the game stop state start time processing is executed (step 73AKS013), and setting confirmation is performed. Control to start notification is performed (step 73AKS014). Subsequently, control is performed to execute a short initial operation (step 73AKS015). By executing the control in step 73AKS015, when it is in the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the control for executing the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position. It can be performed. Also in the period after step 73AKS016, the control in step 73AKS015 may be continuously executed until the short initial operation period ends, and the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed.

Following the control in step 73AKS015, it is determined whether or not to end the setting confirmation (step 73AKS016). If the setting confirmation is not finished (step 73AKS016; No), step 73AKS016 is repeatedly executed to wait. When it is determined at step 73AKS016 that the setting confirmation is finished (step 73AKS016; Yes), control is performed to finish the setting confirmation notification (step 73AKS017), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 73AKS018). Next, control is performed to execute a long initial operation (step 73AKS019), and the power-on command processing ends. By executing the control in step 73 AKS019, after the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is completed, the long initial operation, which is the initial operation of the movable member, is executed. control. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 73AKS019, in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value, the short initial operation as the return operation is followed by the long initial operation as the initial operation. You can choose not to control the execution of Even after the power-on command processing ends, the control in step 73AKS019 may continue to be executed until the long initial operation period ends, and control to execute the long initial operation may be performed.

When it is determined in step 73AKS002 that the received command is a power failure restoration designation command (step 73AKS002; Yes), control is performed to execute short initial operation (step 73AKS020), followed by control to execute long initial operation. (step 73AKS021), the power-on command processing is terminated. In step 73AKS021, after the short initial operation by the control in step 73AKS020 is finished, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started. By executing the control in steps 73AKS020 and 73AKS021, when the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, the short initial operation as the return operation is followed by the long initial operation as the initial operation. Controls can be exercised to perform actions. Even after the power-on command processing ends, the control in step 73AKS021 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and the control for executing the long initial operation may be executed. The control in step 73AKS019 and the control in step 73AKS021 may be performed by common processing using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02, as in the case of the characteristic portion 72AK. Alternatively, the control in step 73AKS019 and the control in step 73AKS021 may be performed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02, as in the case of the characteristic portion 72AK.

FIG. 8-46 shows a setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 displayed during execution of the setting confirmation notification regarding the characteristic portion 73AK. On the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, a character image for notifying the message "Confirming setting" is displayed, and the history of setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be displayed. The set value history may be cumulatively stored on the effect control board 12 side by storing the set value information together with the RTC information in a backup area of the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12, for example. Alternatively, the history of the set values can be obtained by storing the set value information together with the RTC information in a predetermined area in a non-volatile storage device (for example, flash memory) provided separately from the RAM 122. may be stored cumulatively at the side. Alternatively, the history of the setting value is stored in the backup area with the setting value information together with the RTC information in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, and when the setting confirmation start command is transmitted In addition, by transmitting a set value history command prepared in advance as an effect control command capable of specifying the history of set values from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the effect control board 12 can supply power. can be specified with the start of

When the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 is displayed, if the movable member is stopped at a position deviated from the origin position, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the display screen of the effect display device 5, and the history of the setting values can be grasped. difficult to do. Therefore, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 73AK, the control in step 73AKS015 is executed, so that the movable Control is performed to execute a short initial operation, which is a return operation for returning the member to the origin position. In this way, when the setting confirmation state is controlled with the start of power supply, unlike the case where the setting change state is controlled, the short initial operation that is the return operation is executed, so that the setting confirmation notification screen is displayed. The history of setting values that can be displayed in 73AKD01 can be easily grasped by the staff of the game arcade or the like. On the other hand, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 73AK, the control in step 73AKS018 enables execution of the long initial operation, so the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed. , control is not performed to execute the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, following the short initial operation, which is the return operation. In this way, when the setting confirmation state is controlled with the start of power supply, while the short initial operation as the return operation is executed in the setting confirmation state, the long initial operation as the initial operation is executed. Since the action is not executed, the long initial action is executed after the game parlor staff or the like can easily grasp the history of the setting values that can be displayed on the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the history of set values from becoming difficult to grasp due to the movable member.

It should be noted that the history of setting values may be displayed even when the setting change state is set. In this case, in the setting change state as the change permission state, control may be performed to execute a short initial operation for returning the movable member to the origin position. In this way, when the set value history can be displayed by controlling to the setting confirmation state with the start of power supply, the short initial operation, which is the return operation, is executed so that the set value It may be possible to easily grasp the history of

As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 73AK, when it is determined that the received command is the RAM clear notification command at step 73AKS001, control is performed at step 73AKS010 to execute the short initial operation. . On the other hand, if it is determined at step 73AKS003 that the received command is a setting change start command, control for executing the short initial operation is not performed until it is determined at step 73AKS007 that the setting change is finished. As a result, when the control for changing the set value is performed, the short initial operation, which is the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position, is not executed, so that the operation for changing the set value is not hindered by the return operation. By doing so, it is possible to prevent troubles in changing the set values. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set value.

In the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 73AK, after it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is completed, the control in step 73AKS010 is performed to perform control to execute a short initial operation as a return operation. In this way, after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed, control is performed to execute the short initial operation as the return operation. It becomes possible to operate the member to appropriately return to the origin position.

In the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 73AK, when it is determined that the received command is the RAM clear notification command in step 73AKS001, the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed to perform the short initial operation which is the return operation. Subsequently, control for executing a long initial operation, which is an initial operation, is performed. At this time, the control in step 73AKS012 is performed to perform control for executing the initialization notification. In this way, when the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized by initializing (clearing) the stored content in the RAM 102 along with the start of power supply by turning on the power, the initialization notification is issued. When this initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute a long initial operation as an initial operation following a short initial operation as a return operation. Further, even when it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is finished, the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed so that the short initial operation as the return operation is followed by the long initial operation as the initial operation. control. As a result, in order to prevent troubles in the work of changing the set value, it is possible to share the operation of the movable member and reduce the control load for operating the movable member. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the setting value.

The history of setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be displayed on the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 73AK, when it is determined in step 73AK004 that the received command is the setting confirmation start command, in step 73AKS015, control is performed to execute a short initial operation. In this manner, when the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, which is a setting confirmation display capable of displaying the history of setting values, is being displayed, control is performed to execute the short initial operation, which is a return operation. As a result, it is possible to easily grasp the setting confirmation display when preventing troubles in changing the setting values. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the setting value.

The effect control CPU 120 controls execution of effects according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 based on the effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 11 . In the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 73AK, when the command 9100H serving as the setting change start command is received in step 73AKS003, it is determined that the received command is the setting change start command. The command 9100H, which is a setting change start command transmitted from the main substrate 11, is different from the command 9000H, which is a RAM clear notification command, the command 9200H, which is a power failure restoration designation command, and the command 9400H, which is a setting confirmation start command. In this way, when the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state that permits the change of the setting values along with the start of power supply upon power-on, a command is transmitted as information different from that in the case of not being controlled to the setting change state. be done. As a result, it is possible to reduce the control load related to the presentation when preventing the work of changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the setting value.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 73AK)
Regarding the characteristic part 73AK, conventionally, there is a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings with different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. Further, as a game machine that returns a movable member to an origin position, there is one described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-221154, for example. However, the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2016-221154 do not take into consideration the case where the setting change conflicts with the operation of the movable member. As a result, there is a possibility that the operation of changing to a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a game machine of means 1 related to the characteristic part 73AK for providing a game machine that can prevent troubles in changing the setting value,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state, etc.) that is advantageous to a player by performing a game,
setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process of step Sa13) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3);
game control means (for example, CPU 103 for executing special symbol process processing in step S25, etc.) capable of progressing the game so that the degree of advantage for the player differs based on the set value;
setting control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the processes of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the change of the setting value by the setting means with the start of power supply;
A movable member that can be moved according to the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member that is operated by operation motors AK011 to AK013, a second movable member that is operated by operation motor AK014, etc.);
At least, a movable control means capable of executing control of a return operation that returns the movable member to the origin position (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes a power-on command process at step AKS012, etc.)
The movable control means is
When the control to the change permission state is not performed due to the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the return operation (for example, step 73AKS010 is executed),
not control to execute the return operation (for example, execution of steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009) when in the change permission state;
It may be a game machine characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the return operation for returning the movable member to the original position is not executed in the change-permitted state, it is possible to prevent troubles in changing the set value.

As a game machine of means 2 related to the characteristic part 73AK,
The movable control means performs control to execute the return operation after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 73AKS010),
The game machine of the means 1 related to the characterizing portion 73AK characterized by:
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately operate the movable member and prevent trouble in changing the set value.

As a game machine of means 3 related to the characteristic part 73AK,
When the game machine is initialized with the start of power supply, initialization notification means for executing initialization notification (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, effect control CPU 120 for executing step 73AKS012 etc.)
The movable control means is
When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute the initial movement by the movable member following the return movement (for example, execution of steps 73AKS010 to 73AKS012),
After the change permission state ends, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of step 73AKS010 following steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009);
It may be a game machine of means 1 or 2 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK characterized by:
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control burden by standardizing the operations of the movable members, and to prevent the work of changing the set values from being hindered.

As a game machine of means 4 related to the characteristic part 73AK,
Setting display means (for example, effect display device 5 etc.) capable of executing setting confirmation display for confirming the setting value set by the setting means,
The setting display means can display a history of setting values set by the setting means in the setting confirmation display (for example, display of setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01),
When the setting confirmation display is being performed, the movable control means performs control to perform the return operation and does not perform control to perform the initial operation (for example, execution of steps 73AKS015 and 73AKS016),
Any one of the means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK characterized by:
In such a configuration, when the setting confirmation display is being executed, the initial operation by the movable member is not executed, so that the setting confirmation display can be easily grasped, and the setting value changing operation is not hindered. can be prevented.

As a game machine of means 5 related to the characteristic part 73AK,
Effect control means for controlling the execution of effects based on information from the game control means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing command analysis processing of AKS015, etc.)
When the game control means is controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, it transmits information different from when it is not controlled to the change permission state (for example, a command 9100H as a setting change start command). ,
Any one of the means 1 to 4 relating to the characterizing part 73AK characterized by
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load of the performance control means and prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 74AK)
FIG. 8-47 relates to the characterizing portion 74AK of this embodiment, and shows a configuration example of an effect control pattern 74AKP01 used for executing the confirmation effect. Production control pattern 74AKP
01 may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 . The confirmation effect is controlled so as to be executable based on establishment of a predetermined confirmation effect condition after power supply is started by turning on the power. The confirmation effect of the characteristic portion 74AK includes the output of a confirmation sound of outputting the trumpet sound twice from the left speaker 8L, the output of a confirmation sound of outputting the drum sound twice from the right speaker 8R, and the output of the stick controller 31A. Confirmation vibration is included in which two sets of vibration motors built in the operating rod (lever) are driven in a predetermined pattern. The effect control pattern 74AKP01 includes data indicating a confirmation effect process timer initial value 74AKJ00, and enables the setting of the initial value of the confirmation effect process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, for example. In addition, the effect control pattern 74AKP01 includes first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 associated with the confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKJ01, second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02 associated with the confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKJ02, confirmation A first confirmation effect control data 74AKD03 associated with the effect process timer determination value 74AKJ03 is included. The first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 is used to control the output of the confirmation sound that outputs the trumpet sound twice from the left speaker 8L. The second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02 is used to control the output of the confirmation sound for outputting the drum sound twice from the right speaker 8R. The third confirmation effect control data 74AKD03 is used to control confirmation vibrations for driving two sets of vibration motors built in the operating rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A in a predetermined pattern. When the execution of the confirmation effect is controlled, the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer is updated, and when it matches with any of the confirmation effect process timer determination values 74AKJ01 to 74AKJ03, the first to third confirmations corresponding to the matching determination values. By performing control using the effect control data 74AKD03, confirmation sound output and confirmation vibration can be executed.

Also, during execution of the confirmation effect, some or all of the light-emitting members included in the game effect lamp 9 may be lit. For example, when the confirmation effect is started, lighting of the light-emitting member is started, and output of confirmation sound from the left speaker 8L is started. When the left speaker 8L finishes outputting the confirmation sound, the right speaker 8R starts outputting the confirmation sound. When the output of the confirmation sound by the right speaker 8R is finished, the confirmation vibration is started by the vibration motor incorporated in the operating rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A. Then, when the confirmation vibration by the vibration motor built in the operating rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A ends, the light-emitting member is extinguished, and the confirmation effect ends. In the confirmation effect, after the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the confirmation effect conditions are established by detecting the operation of pressing the push button 31B within a predetermined confirmation acceptance period. to start execution. Any one of the confirmation sound output by the left speaker 8L, the confirmation sound output by the right speaker 8R, and the confirmation vibration by the vibration motor built into the operation lever (lever) of the stick controller 31A. is performed, control for performing other effects is not performed. In this way, when one of the confirmation sound output and the confirmation vibration included in the confirmation effect is executed, control may be performed so as not to execute the other effects. By executing the output of the confirmation sound and the confirmation vibration at different timings in this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the production using each production device can be normally executed. can be done.

FIG. 8-48 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 regarding the characteristic portion 74AK. This effect control main process may be executed in place of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of the characteristic portion 74AK, the effect control CPU 120 executes the initialization process (step 74AKS011) and the power-on command process (step 74AKS012) in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and then the timer interrupt flag is turned on. It is determined whether or not (step 74AKS013), and if it is off (step 74AKS013; No), step 74AKS013
repeatedly and wait. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt flag is ON (step 74AKS013; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step 74AKS014), command analysis processing (step 74AKS015), effect control process processing. (Step 74AKS016) and random number update processing for effect (Step 74AKS017) are executed in order. Furthermore, in the effect control main process of the characteristic part 74AK, after executing the confirmation effect control process (step 74AKS018), the process returns to step 74AKS013.

FIG. 8-49 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed at step 74AKS018 as the confirmation effect control process. In the confirmation effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not initialization notification has been started (step 74AKS031). For example, in the power-on command process of the above-described embodiment, the initialization notification is started by executing the control in step AKS030. After that, when the determination in step 74AKS031 is performed for the first time, it may be determined that the initialization notification is started. An initialization notification start flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and it may be determined that the initialization notification has started when the initialization notification start flag is ON.

If it is determined at step 74AKS031 that the initialization notification is started (step 74AKS031; Yes), control is performed to start the confirmation acceptance period (step 74AKS032). The confirmation reception period may be started when the initialization notification is started, and may end when a predetermined confirmation reception time such as 30 seconds or 1 minute elapses.

If it is determined at step 74AKS031 that the initialization notification has not started (step 74AKS031; No), it is determined whether or not it is the confirmation acceptance period (step 74AKS033). If the confirmation acceptance period has started at step 74AKS032, or if it is determined that the confirmation acceptance period has started at step 74AKS033 (step 74AKS033; Yes), it is determined whether or not the variable display has started (step 74AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may determine that the variable display has started by receiving the first variation start command or the second variation start command transmitted from the main board 11 .

When it is determined at step 74AKS034 that the variable display is started (step 74AKS034; Yes), control is performed to stop the confirmation acceptance period (step 74AKS035), and the confirmation effect control process is terminated. In this way, when the variable display is started during the confirmation reception period, the confirmation reception period is stopped, and the confirmation performance condition is restricted so as not to be satisfied. By canceling the confirmation acceptance period along with the start of the variable display, the execution of the performance accompanying the progress of the game and the execution of the confirmation performance are controlled so as not to overlap, and the confirmation performance can be appropriately executed.

When it is determined at step 74AKS034 that the variable display is not started (step 74AKS034; No), it is determined whether or not an action for starting the confirmation effect has been detected (step 74AKS036). At step 74AKS036, when the action of pressing the push button 31B is detected, it is determined that the action for starting the confirmation effect has been detected. At this time, if no action is detected (step 74AKS036; No), the confirmation effect control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the motion is detected (step 74AKS036; Yes), the effect control pattern 74AKP01 used for executing the confirmation effect is read out from a predetermined area of the ROM 121 (step 74AKS037), and the confirmation effect process The timer initial value 74AKJ00 is set in the confirmation effect process timer (step 74AKS038). In addition, the timer value is set to be judged by the first confirmation effect process timer judgment value 74AKD01 (step 74AKS039).
), go to step 74AKS046. If it is determined in step 74AKS036 that an action has been detected and settings are made for executing a confirmation effect, control for ending the confirmation acceptance period may be performed.

When it is determined at step 74AKS033 that it is not the confirmation reception period (step 74AKS033; No), it is determined whether or not the confirmation effect is being performed (step 74AKS040). At step 74AKS040, for example, when the measurement of the elapsed time by the confirmation effect process timer has started, it may be determined that the confirmation effect is in progress. At this time, if it is not during the confirmation effect (step 74AKS040; No), the confirmation effect control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the confirmation effect is being performed (step 74AKS040; Yes), it is determined whether or not the variable display has started (step 74AKS041). Then, when it is determined that the variable display is started (step 74AKS041; Yes), control is performed to stop the confirmation effect (step 74AKS042), and the confirmation effect control process ends. In this way, when the variable display is started during the confirmation effect, the execution of the confirmation effect is stopped, so that the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game and the execution of the confirmation effect are controlled so as not to overlap. , the confirmation effect can be executed appropriately.

When it is determined at step 74AKS041 that the variable display is not started (step 74AKS041; No), update control of the confirmation effect process timer is performed (step 74AKS043). Next, it is determined whether or not the confirmation effect process timer has timed out (step 74AKS044). At this time, if a timeout has occurred (step 74AKS044; Yes), control is performed to terminate the confirmation effect (step 74AKS045), and the confirmation effect control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that timeout has not occurred (step 74AKS044; No), it is determined whether or not the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer matches the determination value (step 74AKS046). If it does not match the judgment value (step 74AKS046; No), the confirmation effect control process is terminated.

When it is determined at step 74AKS046 that it matches the determination value (step 74AKS046; Yes), an effect using confirmation effect control data corresponding to the determination value is started (step 74AKS047). Moreover, after setting so that the timer value is determined by the confirmation effect process timer determination value stored next in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 (step 74AKS048), the confirmation effect control process is terminated.

FIG. 8-50 is a timing chart and the like showing an example of confirmation effect control with respect to the characteristic portion 74AK. In FIG. 8-50(A), when the power supply is started by turning on the power, the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected, but the operation of turning on the lock switch 51 is not detected. Correspondingly, the case where control is not performed in the setting change state is shown. FIG. 8-50(B) shows that when the power supply is started by turning on the power, the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected and the operation of switching the lock switch 51 to ON is detected. corresponds to the setting change state. FIG. 8-50(C) shows the control contents at each timing.

With the start of power supply by turning on the power at timing 74AKT01, when the setting change state is not controlled, in the production control board 12, for example, the production control CPU 120 determines that the RAM clear notification command has been received at timing 74AKT02. . In the power-on command process of the above embodiment, the received command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step AKS021, so control is performed in step AKS030 to start initialization notification. Then, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018 included in the effect control main process of the characteristic part 74AK, it is determined that the initialization notification is started at step 74AKS031, and the confirmation acceptance period is started by the control at step 74AKS032. be. At timing 74AKT03 within the confirmation detection period, when the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected, it is determined that the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected in step 74AKS036 of the confirmation effect control process, and the confirmation effect control process is performed. , steps 74AKS037 to 74AKS048, control for executing a confirmation effect is started. By starting the control for executing the confirmation effect in this way, using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, etc., a plurality of types of first to third confirmation effects Performances are executed in order. After that, at timing 74AKT04, it is determined that the confirmation effect process timer has timed out in step 74AKS044 of the confirmation effect control process, and the confirmation effect ends by performing control in step 74AKS045.

On the other hand, with the start of power supply by turning on the power at timing 74AKT11, when it is controlled to the setting change state, in the production control board 12, for example, the production control CPU 120 issues a setting change start command at timing 74AKT12. It is determined that it has been received. In the power-on command process of the above embodiment, the received command is determined to be a setting change start command in step AKS023, and after the game stop state start process of step AKS025 is executed, control of step AKS026 is performed, and setting change notification is started. At this time, except when the setting change end command is received, the control for continuously executing the setting change notification is performed, and the control for executing the initialization notification, etc. is not started. After that, at timing 74AKT13, when the setting change end command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, it is determined in step AKS027 of the command processing at power-on that the setting change is ended, and following steps AKS028 and AKS029, , the control of step AKS030 is performed, and initialization notification is started.

Thus, when the initialization notification by the control of step AKS030 is started at timing 74AKT13, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018 included in the effect control main process of the characteristic part 74AK, the initialization notification is performed in step 74AKS031. , and the confirmation acceptance period is started under the control of step 74AKS032. Therefore, at timing 74AKT13, the confirmation acceptance period starts with the start of the initialization notification. At timing 74AKT14 within this confirmation acceptance period, when the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected, it is determined that the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected in step 74AKS036 of the confirmation effect control process, and the confirmation effect control process is performed. , steps 74AKS037 to 74AKS048, control for executing a confirmation effect is started. By starting the control for executing the confirmation effect in this way, using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, etc., a plurality of types of first to third confirmation effects Performances are executed in order. After that, at timing 74AKT15, it is determined that the confirmation effect process timer has timed out in step 74AKS044 of the confirmation effect control process, and the confirmation effect ends by performing control in step 74AKS045.

Note that the effect included in the confirmation effect may be any effect using any effect device provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, in addition to or instead of confirming vibration by driving a vibration motor built into the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A, confirming vibration is generated by driving a vibration motor built into the push button 31B. can be executed.

As described above, in the effect control main process of the characterizing part 74AK, after executing the power-on command process at step 74AKS012 in the same manner as in the above embodiment, the confirmation effect control process is executed at step 74AKS018. In the power-on command process, for example, in step AKS025 or step AKS031, a game stop state start process is executed. After the game stop state start processing is executed, the reception of a command different from the setting change end command or the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and the control related to normal performance is regulated so as not to be executed. In this case, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed either. On the other hand, if it is determined in step AKS021 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command, in step AKS030 control is performed to execute initialization notification. After that, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018, when the confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on the fact that it is determined that the initialization notification is started in step 74AKS031, the process proceeds to step 74AKS037 and thereafter, and the confirmation effect is performed. Control the execution. In this way, when the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state that permits the change of the setting value with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed. As a result, the control for changing the setting value is prioritized over the control for executing the confirmation effect, so that it is possible to prevent the work of changing the setting value from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set value.

In the power-on command processing, control in steps AKS025 to AKS030 and the like are performed according to the setting change state. After that, by executing the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process, after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed, control to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition is performed. conduct. As a result, it is possible to properly execute the confirmation effect when preventing troubles in the work of changing the set value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set value.

The push button 31B and the push sensor 35B are configured to be able to detect actions such as pressing operations by the player. In the confirmation effect control process of the characteristic part 74AK, the confirmation acceptance period is entered by executing the control in step 74AKS032, and then the confirmation effect condition is established by determining that the start motion is detected in step 74AKS036. . As a result, it is possible to properly execute the confirmation effect when preventing troubles in the work of changing the set value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set value.

When executing the confirmation effect control process at step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process of the characteristic part 74AK, the control at step 74AKS032 is executed, so that the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) without being controlled to the setting confirmation state. ), the confirmation reception period is the same as when the setting confirmation state ends. Control for executing the confirmation effect is performed according to establishment of the confirmation effect conditions during the confirmation reception period. As a result, in the case of preventing troubles in the work of changing the setting value, it is possible to standardize the control related to the execution of the confirmation effect and reduce the control burden of the confirmation effect. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set value.

The effect control pattern 74AKP01 used in the characteristic portion 74AK includes first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 and second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02, thereby enabling control for outputting confirmation sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this way, the confirmation effect includes the output of confirmation sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R, which serve as sound output means. As a result, it is possible to properly execute the confirmation effect when preventing troubles in the work of changing the set value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set value.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 74AK)
Regarding the characteristic part 74AK, conventionally, there is a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings with different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine that performs control to output a confirmation sound, there is one described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-220833, for example. However, the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2016-220833 do not take into consideration the case where the setting change conflicts with the confirmation effect. As a result, there is a possibility that the operation of changing to a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a game machine of means 1 related to the characteristic part 74AK for providing a game machine that can prevent troubles in changing the setting value,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state, etc.) that is advantageous to a player by performing a game,
setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process of step Sa13) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3);
game control means (for example, CPU 103 for executing special symbol process processing in step S25, etc.) capable of progressing the game so that the degree of advantage for the player differs based on the set value;
a setting control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the processes of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the change of the setting value by the setting means with the start of power supply;
Production means capable of executing production (for example, production display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.),
Confirmation control means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control that executes the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018, etc.) capable of executing control of the confirmation effect by the effect means based on the establishment of the confirmation effect condition after the power supply is started; with
The confirmation control means is
When it is not controlled to the change permission state due to the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect in response to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, step 74AKS018 is executed after steps AKS021 and AKS030 are executed). ),
When it is in the change permission state, control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed (for example, execution of steps AKS025 to AKS029),
It may be a game machine characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the confirmation effect is not executed in the change-permitted state, it is possible to prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a game machine of means 2 related to the characteristic part 74AK,
After the change permission state ends, the confirmation control means performs control to execute the confirmation effect in accordance with the establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, execution of step 74AKS018 after execution of steps AKS025 to AKS030). ),
The game machine of the means 1 related to the characterizing portion 74AK characterized by:
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a game machine of means 3 related to the characteristic part 74AK,
Equipped with game detecting means (for example, push button 31B, push sensor 35B, etc.) capable of detecting actions by the player,
The confirmation effect condition is established based on the detection of the action by the game detection means during the confirmation reception period (for example, execution of step 74AKS036, etc.),
It may be a game machine of means 1 or 2 relating to the characteristic part 74AK characterized by:
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a game machine of means 4 related to the characteristic part 74AK,
The confirmation control means, when initialization is performed without being controlled to the change-permitted state with the start of power supply, sets the confirmation performance condition during the same confirmation acceptance period as when the change-permitted state ends. Perform control to execute the confirmation effect according to establishment (for example, execution of steps 74AKS033, 74AKS036, etc.),
Any one of the means 1 to 3 related to the characterizing portion 74AK may be a game machine characterized by:
In such a configuration, it is possible to share the execution of the confirmation effect and prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a game machine of means 5 related to the characteristic part 74AK,
Equipped with sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of outputting production sounds,
The confirmation effect includes output of confirmation sound by the sound output means (for example, execution of step 74AKS047 using first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01, second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02, etc.),
Any one of the means 1 to 4 relating to the characterizing part 74AK characterized by:
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 75AK)
FIG. 8-51 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on command processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 regarding the characterizing portion 75AK of this embodiment. This power-on command processing may be executed at step 74AKS012 of the effect control main processing in the characteristic portion 74AK of the above embodiment. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 75AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines the received command from the main substrate 11 in the same manner as in the above embodiment (steps 75AKS001 to 75AKS004). When it is determined that the received command is a setting change start command at step 75AK003 (step 75AKS003; Yes), as in the above embodiment, the game stop state starting process is executed (step 75AKS005), and the setting is changed. Control to start notification is performed (step 75AKS006).

After performing the control in step 75AKS006, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step 75AKS007). If the setting change is not finished (step 75AKS007; No), unlike the above embodiment, after executing the confirmation effect control process during setting change (step 75AKS008), the process returns to step 75AKS007. As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characterizing portion 75AK, the setting change confirmation effect control processing is executed in step 75AKS008, thereby controlling the setting change state as the change permission state with the start of power supply. At the time, control for executing the confirmation effect can be performed. When it is determined at step 75AKS007 that the setting change is finished (step 75AKS007; Yes), control is performed to finish notification of the setting change (step 75AKS009), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 75AKS010).

If it is determined that the received command is a RAM clear notification command at step 75AKS001 (step 75AKS001; Yes), or after executing the game stop state end processing at step 75AKS010, control to execute initialization notification is performed. (step 75AKS011), and the power-on command processing ends.

If it is determined at step 75AKS003 that the received command is a setting confirmation start command (step 75AKS003; Yes), similarly to the above embodiment, after executing the processing corresponding to the setting confirmation state (steps 75AKS012 to 75AKS016 ) to end command processing at power-on. As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 75AK, when the setting change state is controlled with the start of power supply, the setting change confirmation effect control processing of step 75AKS008 is executed, while the setting confirmation state is entered. When it is controlled, the process corresponding to the confirmation effect control process during setting change is not executed. Therefore, while the control to enable execution of the confirmation effect is performed in the setting change state, the control to enable execution of the confirmation effect is not performed in the setting confirmation state.

FIG. 8-52 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 75AKS008 as the confirmation effect control process during setting change. In the confirmation effect control process during setting confirmation, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the confirmation effect has been completed (step 75AKS031). In step 75AKS031, for example, when a confirmation effect completion flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 is ON, it may be determined that the confirmation effect has been completed. The confirmation effect completion flag may be set to ON state when execution of the confirmation effect is completed. When the confirmation effect has been completed in step 75AKS031 (step 75AKS031; Yes), the confirmation effect control process during setting change is terminated.

When it is determined at step 75AKS031 that the confirmation effect has not been completed (step 75AKS031; No), it is determined whether or not the confirmation effect is being performed (step 75AKS032). At this time, if the confirmation effect is not being performed (step 75AKS032; No), it is determined whether or not an action for starting the confirmation effect has been detected (step 75AKS033). If no action is detected at step 75AKS033 (step 75AKS033; No), the confirmation effect control process during setting change is terminated. When it is determined that the operation is detected in step 75AKS033 (step 75AKS033; Yes), the effect control pattern 74AKP01 is read as a setting for starting the execution of the confirmation effect (step 75AKS034), and the confirmation effect process timer is initialized. A value 74AKJ00 is set (step 75AKS035), and a first confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKD01 is set (step 75AKS036). Thus, in the confirmation effect control processing during setting change, since the determination of step 75AKS033 is performed, when the setting change state is the change permission state, any fixed period such as the confirmation reception period is not provided. When the operation of pressing down the push button 31B is detected at the timing, the confirmation effect condition is satisfied and the execution of the confirmation effect can be started.

When it is determined at step 75AKS032 that the confirmation effect is being performed (step 75AKS032; Yes), update control of the confirmation effect process timer is performed (step 75AKS037), and it is determined whether or not timeout has occurred (step 75AKS038). ). At this time, if a timeout has occurred (step 75AKS038; Yes), control is performed to terminate the confirmation effect (step 75AKS039), and the confirmation effect control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that timeout has not occurred (step 75AKS038; No), it is determined whether or not the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer matches the determination value (step 75AKS040). If it does not match the judgment value (step 75AKS040; No), the confirmation effect control process is terminated.

When it is determined at step 75AKS040 that it matches the determination value (step 75AKS040; Yes), an effect using confirmation effect control data corresponding to the determination value is started (step 75AKS041). Moreover, after setting so that the timer value is determined by the confirmation effect process timer determination value stored next in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 (step 75AKS042), the confirmation effect control process is terminated.

FIG. 8-53 is a timing chart and the like showing a control example of the confirmation effect with respect to the characteristic portion 75AK. In FIG. 8-53(A), when the power supply is started by turning on the power, the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected, but the operation of turning on the lock switch 51 is not detected. Correspondingly, the case where control is not performed to the setting change state is shown. FIG. 8-53(B) shows that when the power supply is started by turning on the power, the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected and the operation of switching the lock switch 51 to ON is detected. corresponds to the setting change state. Figure 8-
53(C) shows the control content at each timing.

When the setting change state is not controlled due to the start of power supply due to the power-on at the timing 75AKT01, it is the same as the case where the characteristic portion 74AK does not control the setting change state, and the RAM clear notification command is received at the timing 74AKT02. As a result, the initialization notification is started, and the confirmation acceptance period is started accordingly. At the timing 75AKT03 within this confirmation acceptance period, when the start operation of the confirmation production is detected, the control for executing the confirmation production is started, and the first to third confirmation production control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the production control pattern 74AKP01, etc. are used to sequentially execute a plurality of types of effects serving as the first to third confirmation effects. After that, when the timing 75AKT04 comes, the confirmation effect ends.

On the other hand, when the power supply is started by turning on the power at the timing 75AKT11, the setting is changed at the timing 75AKT12, unlike the case where the characteristic portion 74AK controls the setting change state. By receiving the start command, it is determined in step 75AKS003 of the power-on command processing that the received command is the setting change start command. As a result, following steps 75AKS005 and 75AKS006, it is determined whether or not the setting change is finished at step 75AKS007. If not finished at this time, a confirmation effect control process during setting change is executed at step 75AKS008. be. In the confirmation effect control processing during setting change of the characteristic portion 75AK, when it is determined that the confirmation effect is not being performed in step 75AKS032, it is determined whether or not the start motion is detected in step 75AKS033. In this way, when the setting change state is the change permission state, the confirmation effect condition can be established by detecting the operation of pressing the push button 31B. For example, at timing 75AKT13 when in the setting change state, when the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected, it is determined that the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected at step 75AKS033 of the confirmation effect control process during setting change. , Steps 75AKS034 to 75AKS042 of the confirmation effect control process during setting change, control for executing the confirmation effect is started. In this way, using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, a plurality of types of effects to be the first to third confirmation effects are executed in order. After that, at timing 75AKT14, the confirmation effect ends.

After the timing 75AKT14, when the setting change end command transmitted from the main substrate 11 is received at the timing 75AKT15, it is determined in step 75AKS007 that the setting change is ended in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 75AK. Thus, following steps 75AKS009 and 75AKS010, the control of step 75AKS011 is performed, and the initialization notification is started. When this initialization notification is started, as in the case of the feature part 74AK, the confirmation reception period is started by executing the confirmation production control process at step 74AKS018 of the production control main process. Just do it. Then, when the operation for starting the confirmation effect is detected during the confirmation acceptance period, the control for executing the confirmation effect may be started again.

As described above, the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 75AK includes the confirmation effect control processing during setting change executed at step 75AKS008, and the start operation is detected at step 75AKS033 of the confirmation effect control processing during setting change. If it is determined that there has been, the process proceeds to step 74AKS037 and subsequent steps due to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition, and control for executing the confirmation effect is performed. In this way, when the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state permitting the change of the setting value with the start of power supply by turning on the power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect based on the establishment of the confirmation effect conditions. Therefore, by making it possible to execute the confirmation effect when in the setting change state as the change permission state, the state of the game machine can be accurately confirmed, and the work of confirming the state of the game machine can be prevented from being hindered. can be prevented.

In the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 75AK, when it is determined that the received command is the RAM clear notification command in step 75AKS001, confirmation reception is performed by executing the same confirmation effect control processing as in the characteristic portion 74AK. period begins. During this confirmation acceptance period, control is performed to execute a confirmation performance in response to the establishment of confirmation performance conditions. On the other hand, in the confirmation effect control process during setting change, when it is determined that the start motion is detected in step 75AKS033 without providing a confirmation reception period, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect. As a result, the confirmation effect can be executed at any time when the setting is changed as the change permission condition. can run properly.

In the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 75AK, control in steps 75AKS005 to 75AKS011 and the like are performed according to the setting change state. After that, the confirmation acceptance period is started by executing the same confirmation effect control process as that of the characteristic part 74AK. In this way, after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect conditions during the confirmation reception period, so that the operation of confirming the state of the game machine is hindered. When preventing this, the confirmation effect can be properly executed.

The push button 31B and the push sensor 35B are configured to be able to detect actions such as pressing operations by the player. For example, in the confirmation effect control process during setting change of the characteristic portion 75AK, the confirmation effect condition is established by determining that the start motion is detected in step 75AKS033. Further, by executing the same confirmation effect control process as that of the characteristic portion 74AK, it is determined that the start motion is detected in step 74AKS036, thereby establishing the confirmation effect condition. As a result, the confirmation effect can be properly executed in the case of preventing trouble in the operation of confirming the state of the gaming machine.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 75AK)
Regarding the characteristic part 75AK, conventionally, there is a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings with different degrees of advantage for the player, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine that performs control to output a confirmation sound, there is one described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-220833, for example. However, the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2016-220833 do not take into consideration the case where the setting change conflicts with the confirmation effect. As a result, there is a possibility that the operation of confirming the state of the game machine will be hindered. Therefore, as a game machine of means 1 related to the characteristic part 75AK for providing a game machine capable of preventing trouble in confirming the state of the game machine,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state, etc.) that is advantageous to a player by performing a game,
setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process of step Sa13) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3);
game control means (for example, CPU 103 for executing special symbol process processing in step S25, etc.) capable of progressing the game so that the degree of advantage for the player differs based on the set value;
a setting control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the processes of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the change of the setting value by the setting means with the start of power supply;
Production means capable of executing production (for example, production display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.),
After the power supply is started, confirmation control means (for example, confirmation effect control processing of step 74AKS018, confirmation effect control during setting change of step 75AKS008) that can execute control of confirmation effect by the effect means based on establishment of confirmation effect conditions Production control CPU 120 etc. for executing processing) and
The confirmation control means is
When it is not controlled to the change permission state due to the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation reception period (for example, execution of confirmation effect control processing in step 74AKS018). ),
When it is in the change permission state, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect in response to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, execution of confirmation effect control processing during setting change in step 75AKS008),
It may be a game machine characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the confirmation effect can be executed in the change-permitted state, it is possible to accurately confirm the state of the gaming machine and prevent the work of confirming the state of the gaming machine from being hindered. .

As a game machine of means 2 related to the characteristic part 75AK,
The confirmation control means is
When initialization is performed without being controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect in response to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition during the confirmation reception period (for example, step 74AKS033 , execution of 74AKS036, etc.),
When it is in the change permission state, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition without providing a confirmation acceptance period (for example, execution of step 75AKS033),
The game machine of the means 1 related to the characterizing portion 75AK characterized by:
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect along with the change of the set value, and prevent the work of confirming the state of the gaming machine from being hindered.

As a game machine of means 3 related to the characteristic part 75AK,
After the change permission state ends, the confirmation control means performs control to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation reception period (for example, the step after executing steps 75AKS005 to 75AKS011 74AKS018 execution, etc.),
It may be a game machine of means 1 or 2 relating to the characteristic part 75AK characterized by:
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the work of confirming the state of the gaming machine from being hindered.

As a game machine of means 4 related to the characteristic part 75AK,
Equipped with game detection means (for example, push button 31B, push sensor 35B, etc.) capable of detecting actions by the player,
The confirmation effect condition is established based on the detection of the action by the game detection means (for example, execution of step 75AKS033, etc.),
Any one of the means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic portion 75AK characterized by:
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the work of confirming the state of the gaming machine from being hindered.

(Explanation of means common to characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK)
As a game machine of means A related to the characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK,
a setting detection means (for example, lock switch 51, etc.) capable of detecting an operation related to setting;
Initialization detection means (for example, clear switch A
K001, etc.) and
setting confirmation control means (for example, CPU 103 for executing steps AKS001 and AKS002, etc.) capable of controlling the setting confirmation state based on the detection of the operation by the setting detection means upon the start of power supply;
a change permission control means capable of controlling the change permission state based on the detection of the operation by the initialization detection means with the start of power supply (for example, a CPU 103 that executes steps Sa6 and Sa13, etc.);
A game machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK characterized by
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately set the setting value by appropriately controlling the setting confirmation state and the change permission state.

As a game machine of means B related to the characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK,
a setting detection means (for example, lock switch 51, etc.) capable of detecting an operation related to setting;
Initialization detection means (for example, clear switch AK001, etc.) capable of detecting an operation related to initialization;
When the operation is not detected by the detection means for setting and the operation is detected by the detection means for initialization with the start of power supply, the initialization notification is executed at the same time as the start of power supply, and the start of power supply is performed. When the operation is detected by the setting detection means, the initialization notification means for executing the initialization notification after the operation is no longer detected (for example, the effect control for executing the command process at the time of power-on of step AKS012 CPU 120, etc.)
A game machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK characterized by
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately set the set value by properly executing the initialization notification.

As a game machine of means C related to the characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK,
An information display means (for example, a display monitor 29, etc.) capable of displaying information about a game value given based on the entry of a game medium into a predetermined area,
The information display means can display the setting value set by the setting means (for example, display by the first display unit 29A),
A game machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately set the setting value without separately providing a configuration for displaying the setting value.

As a game machine of means D related to characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK,
Effect detection means (for example, output amount changeover switch 71AK001, etc.) capable of detecting an operation related to the output amount of effect,
Display control means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing step AKS026, etc.) that displays the display related to the setting value by the setting means with priority over the display related to the output amount of effect,
A game machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK characterized by
In such a configuration, the setting values are appropriately displayed, and it is possible to prevent troubles in changing the setting values.

As a game machine of means E related to the characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK,
Production control means for controlling the execution of production based on information from the game control means (for example, production control CPU 120 for executing command analysis processing of AKS015, etc.);
When the effect control means is in the change permission state, information restriction means for limiting control based on information different from notification information that notifies the end of the change permission state (for example, effect control CPU 120 that executes AKS027, etc. ) and
A game machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of malfunctions and to appropriately set the set values.

(Explanation relating to association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration regarding the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration regarding other characteristic portions. Features that are combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of each configuration relating to other features as appropriate. For example, regarding the characteristic part 71AK, the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 that executes the output switching process at the start at step 71AKS013 of the effect control main process, and the short initial operation at step 72AK007 of the power-on command process with respect to the characteristic part 72AK Regarding the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 that performs control to be executed, and the characteristic part 73AK, until it is determined in step 73AKS007 of the power-on command process that the setting change is finished, it is for effect control that does not perform control to execute the short initial action. Regarding the configuration of the CPU 120 and the feature part 74AK, the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 that executes the confirmation effect control process at step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process, Regarding the feature part 75AK, the setting is being changed at step 75AKS008 of the power-on command process. The configuration of the effect control CPU 120 that executes the confirmation effect control process may be a combination of part or all as appropriate.

(Description of Characteristic Portions 229F to 233F)
Characteristic portions 229F to 233F of the present embodiment will now be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic parts 229F to 233F of the present embodiment is configured so that the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big win and the small win changes according to the setting value set on the game hall side when the power is turned on. It is For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit and the small hit is changed. The set value has three levels of 1 to 3. Set value 1 has the highest ball payout rate, and set value 1, set value 2, and set value 3 increase the ball payout rate in order. That is, when set value 1 is set as the set value, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest, and as the value increases in the order of set value 2 and set value 3, the degree of advantage decreases stepwise. Note that the set values may be provided in three or more stages. Also, the higher the number, the higher the advantage may be.

For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 229F of the present embodiment, the probability of winning a big win or a small win (ball output rate) changes according to the setting value set on the gaming arcade side when the power is turned on. As an example, the probability of winning a big hit is 1/99 for setting value 1, 1/150 for setting value 2, and 1/200 for setting value 3. The setting value 3 is a setting value for setting the lowest probability of winning a jackpot among a plurality of types of setting values, and is called a low setting. The set value 1 and the set value 2 are set values for which the probability of winning a big hit or the like is set higher than the set value 3 of the low setting, and are called high setting (changed setting). It should be noted that setting value 3 may be used as a normal setting that is basically used, and setting values 1 and 2 may be used as changed settings (high settings) changed from the normal settings.

Regarding the characteristic parts 229F to 232F, the number of rounds is 15 as the type of the jackpot game state executed when the display result of the variable display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 becomes the specific display result (jackpot display result). 15-round jackpot (hereinafter referred to as 15R jackpot) and a 5-round jackpot with five rounds (hereinafter referred to as 5R jackpot). The 15R big win has a larger number of rounds than the 5R big win, and a larger number of winning balls (out balls) can be expected than the 5R big win, so it is more advantageous to the player than the 5R big win. In the following description, "round" may be indicated using the word "R".

The jackpot game state is a game state controlled when the display result of the variable display of the special symbols (special pattern 1, special pattern 2) becomes the jackpot display result (jackpot pattern), and the game ball can win a prize. An open state (a first state advantageous to the player) and a closed state (a second state more disadvantageous to the player than the first state) in which it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to win a prize (including difficulty in winning a prize). By opening and closing the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 as a variable winning means that can be changed to , the large winning opening is opened for a predetermined number of times, such as 15 rounds and 5 rounds. favorable situation.

[Description of Characteristic Portion 229F]
Next, the characteristic portion 229F of this embodiment will be described. In the characteristic part 229F, among the first big win game state and the second big win game state as advantageous states advantageous to the player, the first big win game having a higher advantage for the player due to, for example, a large number of rounds. A description will be given of an effect control example in which a special effect can be executed in the state. As the special effect, for example, at the start of a predetermined game state such as at the start of each round of the jackpot game state, an effect such as an effect of emphasizing that the game is in the predetermined game state is executed.

In the characteristic portion 229F, a plurality of movable accessories that move in front of the image display device 5 are provided as the movable body 32 driven and controlled by the effect control CPU 120 of FIG. Specifically, the movable accessory is an upper movable accessory that is provided above the image display device 5 and moves up and down in front of the image display device 5, and an upper movable accessory that is provided below the image display device 5 and moves up and down in front of the image display device 5. A lower movable accessory that moves up and down in front, a left movable accessory that is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 and moves left and right in front of the image display device 5, and a right side of the image display device 5 Four movable accessories called right movable accessories are provided in front of the image display device 5 and move left and right. These movable accessories are driven and controlled by the effect control CPU 120 . All of these movable accessories are provided in a manner that they are housed inside a center decorative member surrounding the image display device 5 in a standby state, and are moved from the upper, lower, left, and right ends of the image display device 5 by a moving operation. It appears in front of the image display device 5 .

FIG. 9-1 is an effect explanatory drawing including a display screen view of the image display device 5 showing an example of a special effect related to the characteristic part 229F. In FIG. 9-1, (A) to (F) show the production modes in the 15R jackpot game state, and (G) to (L) show the production modes in the 5R jackpot game state. ing.

The length of the interval period between rounds differs between the 15R jackpot and the 5R jackpot. In the interval period, in the special variable winning ball device 7 in the jackpot game state, the big winning opening is closed during the period from the end of the previous open state to the start of the next open state. period. For example, the interval period of the 15R jackpot is 3 seconds, the interval period of the 5R jackpot is 2 seconds, and the interval period of the 15R jackpot with a large number of rounds is set to be longer. The reason why the interval period differs according to the type of the big win is to suppress an excessive number of prize balls to be paid out within a predetermined unit period. In other words, by varying the interval period according to the type of the big win, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from increasing due to the excessive increase in the speed at which the player can obtain prize balls in the big win game state. .

In the 5R jackpot, for example, (G), (J), (L), at the start of each round in the jackpot gaming state, as indicated by "1R", "2R", and "5R" in the figure. A round number image indicating the number of rounds is displayed in a relatively small size on the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and a predetermined series of image displays during the big win are displayed. Then, in the 5R jackpot, a series of predetermined jackpot effect images are displayed in the interval period between rounds in the jackpot game state, such as (I) and (K).

The effect during the big win game state, which is executed in such a 5R big win, is a basic normal effect. On the other hand, in the effect during the big win game state executed with the 15R big win, a special effect is executed as described below.

In the 15R jackpot, a special effect is executed at the start of each round in the jackpot game state, such as (A), (D), and (F). As a special effect, a round number image showing the number of rounds indicated as "1 LUCKY", "2 LUCKY", and "15 LUCKY" in the drawing with numbers and letters "LUCKY" is displayed at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. A special image 229F001, which is an image that is displayed in a size larger than the round number image at the time of the 5R jackpot and displays an aura image that emits light in a predetermined shape around the round number image on almost the entire screen. is displayed.

In each round of the 15R jackpot, after the special image 229F001 as shown in (A) is displayed for a predetermined period at the start, the special image 229F001 is erased as shown in (B) and, for example, "1LUCKY" is displayed. A round number image indicating the number of rounds is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5 in a relatively small size.

Furthermore, in the 15R jackpot, for example, as in (C) and (E), during the interval period between each round in the jackpot game state, by operating the movable accessory, the set value of the winning probability of the jackpot, etc. Interval period setting suggesting effect is executed as a setting suggesting effect suggesting which one of set values 1 to 3 is set. The interval period between rounds is the period from the end of a predetermined game such as the end of a round in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player to the start of the next predetermined game such as the start of the next round, that is, , is the period during which the big prize gate is closed between rounds.

As the special effect, an example of accompanying the round number image indicating the number of rounds has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect of displaying a special image may be executed separately from the round number image. .

In the interval period setting suggesting effect, a movable accessory selected from among the four types of movable accessories described above is used. (C) shows an example in which the upper movable accessory 229F002 moves downward during the interval period between rounds 1R and 2R. (E) shows an example in which the lower movable accessory 229F003 moves upward during the interval period between other rounds.

In the 15R jackpot, for example, as in (C) and (E), during the interval period between each round in the jackpot game state, an image of a movable accessory selected from a plurality of types is displayed as an interval period setting suggestive effect. An effect of moving is performed in front of the display device 5 .

The movable accessory that has moved forward of the image display device 5 is returned to the standby position at the end of the interval period. It should be noted that the timing at which the moved movable accessory 229F002 returns may be during the interval period.

As for the movement effect of the movable character in the interval period setting suggestion effect, the effect of ``moving the upper movable character'', the effect of ``moving the lower movable character'', and the effect of ``moving the left movable character'' , ``move the right movable accessory'', or ``move all the movable accessories''. The types of movable accessories that operate during the interval period between each round are selected according to the set values (set values 1 to 3) such as the jackpot probability set in the pachinko game machine 1. different. As described above, since the selection ratio of the movable role to be moved differs depending on the set value (set values 1 to 3) of the big hit probability, etc., the action of the selected movable role is determined by the set value of the big hit probability. It can be an action suggesting a setting. As a result, during the interval period between rounds, the interval period setting suggestion suggests which of the set values 1 to 3 the set value of the jackpot probability or the like is set to depending on the type of movable accessory that operates. A performance is held.

As shown in FIG. 9-1, in the 15R jackpot, during the interval period between each round in the jackpot game state, the image display device 5 displays a movable accessory selected from a plurality of types as an interval period setting suggestive effect. Since the effect of the moving operation is performed in front of the , the interval period between rounds set longer than the 5R big win can be prevented from making the player feel that it is a long period.

As an example of executing the interval period setting suggesting effect using the movable accessory, as described above, the selection ratio of the movable accessory to be operated among the plurality of types of movable accessories can be changed according to the set value. Although an example of performing an effect suggesting a set value by is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and as another example, the following interval period setting suggesting effect may be executed. For example, by varying the selection ratio of a plurality of types of action modes (movement speed, movement pattern, deformation pattern, etc.) of each movable role according to the set value, an effect suggesting the set value may be produced. . In addition, when the interval period setting suggesting effect is executed using a movable accessory having a luminous body, an effect suggesting a set value may be performed by varying the selection ratio of a plurality of types of light emitting modes. . In addition, when the interval period setting suggesting effect is executed using a movable accessory equipped with an image display device, the set value is suggested by changing the selection ratio of the display mode of the plurality of types of images. may Also, various effects using these movable accessories may be appropriately combined and executed.

FIG. 9-2 is a diagram showing, in tabular form, an interval period setting suggestive effect determination table used for selecting the effect type of the setting suggestive effect to be executed in the interval period between rounds in the jackpot gaming state of the 15R jackpot. be. The interval period setting suggestion effect determination table is stored in the ROM 121 .

In FIG. 9-2, the correspondence between the type of setting suggestion effect executed as the interval period setting suggestion effect (type of movable role) and the allocation of the interval period setting suggestion effect selection random number (displayed as a percentage) is shown. , when set to set value 1, when set to set value 2, and when set to set value 3, respectively. The interval period setting suggestion effect selection random number is a random number for effect selection that is updated by the effect control CPU 120 . As shown in FIG. 9-2, the motion types of the movable role to be operated in the interval period setting suggesting effect are "movement of upper movable role", "movement of lower movable role", and "movement of left movable role". ”, “Movement of right movable object”, and “Movement of all movable objects”.

As shown in FIG. 9-2, the ratio of selection of the setting suggestion effect of "moving upward movable accessory" is 90% or more for each of setting value 1, setting value 2, and setting value 3. , Basically, setting suggestion effects that “move upper movable accessories” are selected at an extremely high rate. As shown in FIG. 9-2, the ratio of selection of the setting suggestion effect of "moving upward movable accessory" has a relationship of "setting value 1<setting value 2<setting value 3". As a result, when the setting suggestion effect of "moving the upper movable accessory" is executed, the ratio of the setting value 3 is the highest.

As shown in FIG. 9-2, the ratio of selecting the setting suggestion effect of "moving the movable role" other than the setting suggestion effect of "moving the upper movable role" is set value 1, set value 2, and 10% or less for each of the set values 3. The ratio of selection of the setting suggestion effect of "moving the lower movable accessory" has a relationship of "setting value 1<setting value 2<setting value 3". As a result, when the setting suggestion effect of "moving the lower movable accessory" is executed, the set value 3 is the highest percentage.

As shown in FIG. 9-2, the ratio of selection of the setting suggestion effect of "moving the left movable accessory" has a relationship of "setting value 3<setting value 1<setting value 2". As a result, when the operation of the setting suggestion effect of "moving the left movable accessory" is performed, the setting value 2 is the highest percentage. As shown in FIG. 9-2, the ratio of selection of the setting suggestion effect of "moving the right movable accessory" has a relationship of "setting value 3<setting value 2<setting value 1". As a result, when the setting suggestion effect of "moving the right movable accessory" is performed, the ratio of the setting value 1 is the highest. As shown in FIG. 9-2, the ratio of selection of the setting suggestion effect of "moving all movable parts" has a relationship of "setting values 2 and 3<setting value 1". 3 is 0%. As a result, the set value 1 is determined when the setting suggestion effect of "moving all movable accessories" is performed.

Then, according to FIG. 9-2, the setting suggestion effect of "moving the lower movable role" and the setting of "moving the left movable role" other than the setting suggestion effect of "moving the upper movable role" For each of the suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect of "moving the right movable role", and the setting suggestion effect of "moving all movable parts", the setting value 3, which is the low setting, is set higher. The ratio of setting value 1 or setting value 2 is high. As a result, other than the setting suggestion effect of ``moving the upper movable role'', the setting suggestion effect of ``moving the lower movable role'', the setting suggestion effect of ``moving the left movable role'', and the ``right movable role'' When the setting suggestion effect of "moving objects" and the setting suggestion effect of "moving all movable parts" are performed, the expectation of high setting is higher than low setting.

When a movable accessory is selected using the interval period setting suggestion effect determination table of FIG. Displayed as a role, setting suggestion to ``move upper movable role'' Setting suggestion to ``move lower movable role'' at a lower frequency than production, setting suggestion to ``move left movable role'' One of the effect, the setting suggesting effect of "moving the right movable role", and the setting suggesting effect of "moving all movable parts" is selected.

Regarding the setting suggestion effect by moving the movable role set in the interval period setting suggestion effect table of FIG. However, in order to make the player pay more attention to the setting suggestion effect by the movable role, for example, for a plurality of types of action patterns by the movable role, up, down, left, and right It is also possible to set an operation pattern in which a plurality of movable accessories are moved step by step, such as sequentially moving the movable accessories. The motion pattern is set so that the upper, lower, left, and right movable accessories are moved step by step in the order of, for example, top → bottom → left → right, and after the upper movable accessory moves first, the other movable accessories should operate step by step in order. In this way, after the upper movable accessory operates with little setting difference between the set values 1 to 3, the high setting is set depending on the stage to which the multiple types of movable accessories operate. It can be directed to suggest settings to be finalized. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the action of the movable accessory which is felt to have little effect on the suggestion of the set value, such as the upper movable accessory which basically always operates. In this way, by performing a setting suggesting effect in which the movable accessory is operated step by step over a certain amount of effect time, it is possible to prevent the player from being bothered by the lengthening of the interval period. can.

In this way, in the interval period setting suggesting effect, it is possible to suggest which set value is set according to the action pattern of the movable accessory. Depending on the type of movable accessory to be operated in the setting suggestion effect, the degree of expectation as to whether the setting is high or not differs, and the degree of expectation as to which of the setting values 1 to 3 corresponds differs. With such an interval period setting suggesting effect, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the set value of a big hit or the like. Furthermore, depending on the type of movable role to be operated in the setting suggestion effect, it may be determined that the setting value 1 is the most advantageous for the player. It is possible to further improve the degree of expectation for the set value such as a big hit by the player. In addition, according to the set values (set values 1 to 3) such as the jackpot probability set in the pachinko game machine 1, the movement of a plurality of movable accessories is constant, but the combinations of colors that the movable objects emit light. may be selected at different rates.

In addition, the movable character to be operated in the setting suggestion effect is provided with only one type of movable character having a display section made up of dot matrix LEDs on the front side, and multiple types of shapes and colors are provided for each interval period between rounds. Any one of the images may be selectively displayed as the character object image. In addition, according to the set values (set values 1 to 3) such as the jackpot probability set in the pachinko game machine 1, the operation is constant for a plurality of character object images, but the color combination of the character object images is selected. different ratios may be used. As described below, the role product image displayed by the movable role product 229F002 during the interval period between each round is based on the set values (set value 1 to Depending on 3), the selected ratio may be different.

FIG. 9-3 is a flow chart showing the effect setting process at the start of the big win. The big hit start time production setting process receives a production control command designating the start of the big hit game state, and when starting the big hit game state, part of the process in the special figure per waiting process (S173) of FIG. It is a process performed as

First, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a performance control command designating a jackpot type for starting a jackpot game state, the jackpot game state to be started is a jackpot 15 rounds jackpot based on confirmation of the received command. It is determined whether or not there is (229FS001). When the 15th round is a big hit (Y at 229FS001), the effect control CPU 120 displays a special effect at the start of each round as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A), (D), and (F). The process table set to be executed is selected (229FS002), and the process ends. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the process when the 15th round jackpot is not achieved (N in 229FS001).

When a process table set to execute highlighting as a special effect at the start of the round is selected in 229FS002 in the effect setting process at the start of the big hit, in the process during the big win of FIG. Based on the set data, highlighting is performed as a special effect at the start of each round as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A), (D), and (F).

FIG. 9-4 is a flowchart showing interval effect setting processing. The interval effect setting process is a process performed as a part of the process during the big hit (S176) in FIG.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether it is time to receive a designated command after opening the big winning hole, which is the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the big winning hole changes from the open state to the closed state. By confirming whether or not, it is determined whether or not it is time to start closing the big winning opening (229FS005). This confirms whether or not it is time to start the interval period between each round.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it is time to receive the specified command after opening the big winning opening (Y in 229FS005), it determines whether or not the big winning game state being executed is a 15 round big winning big winning game state. (229FS006). When the game is in the 15th round jackpot game state (Y in 229FS006), the effect control CPU 120 extracts the effect selection random number for the interval period setting suggestive effect, and uses the interval period setting suggestive effect determination table of FIG. 9-2. determines the type of interval period setting suggesting effect according to the current set values (set values 1 to 3) as described above, and sets data for executing the determined interval period setting suggesting effect (229FS007); End the process. On the other hand, if the 15th round is not a big hit (N in 229FS006), the effect control CPU 120 continues the effect executed during the previous round as a normal interval effect (229FS008), and executes the process. finish.

In 229FS007 in the big hit start time production setting processing, when the type of the interval period setting suggestion production is determined and the data setting for executing the determined interval period setting suggestion production is performed, in the production processing during the big hit of FIG. , 229FS007, the interval period setting suggestion effect is executed in the interval period between each round as shown in FIGS. 9-1(C) and (E).

[Holding continuation suggestion production by action pattern of movable character]
In addition, in the interval period of each round, whether or not the pending memory information (holding information) contains the pending memory information (holding memory information that becomes a so-called pending group) that will be a big hit (whether it will be a pending group) is performed, and when the reserved storage information for a big hit is included, for example, an action pattern is selected from a plurality of types of action patterns of the movable role as shown in FIG. When activated, the effect control CPU 120 may execute an effect (holding consecutive suggestion effect) that suggests that the holding storage information that will result in a big hit is included. For example, as a selection table for selecting an action pattern of a movable accessory, a data table is used in which data sorting for action pattern selection is set so that a high setting is determined unless a holding consecutive suggestion effect is executed. , the motion pattern of the movable accessory may be selected. Specifically, in the selection table for selecting the action pattern of the movable accessory, as a special action pattern, it is selected only when there is hold storage information that becomes a hold group when the setting is low, and when the setting is high Data allocation for selection of operation patterns may be set so that selection is made even if there is no pending storage information to become a pending group. In this way, it is possible to almost determine the high setting if the holding consecutive suggestion effect is not executed. When the action pattern of the movable accessory is selected in this way, since the holding group is related to the effect, the player can be made to pay attention to the game after the big win game state is finished. In addition, as a holding replay suggestive effect by the action pattern of the movable role, it may be executed during the round in addition to the interval period of each round, or may not be executed during the interval period of each round. (At the end of the jackpot game state) may be executed.

[Setting Suggestion Effect with Character Image]
In addition, it is possible to select and display a plurality of types of character images accompanying or included in the above-mentioned special effect image, and effect control of the setting suggesting effect is performed according to the type of the character image to be displayed. may be executed by the dedicated CPU 120. In that case, the selection ratio of the character image type may be varied according to the setting values 1-3. In addition, in the case of executing the setting suggestion effect depending on the type of character image to be displayed, the operation of the movable role selected as described above and the display of the character image selected in this way are performed during the interval period of each round. Depending on the combination, a setting suggestion effect may be performed.

As the jackpot game state, there is shown an example of repeating a predetermined game in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened for a predetermined period of time. Control may be performed to repeat a predetermined game for opening the winning opening.

Also, as the special effect, an example has been shown in which it is executed only when the 15R big win is advantageous for the player, but it is not limited to this, and may be executed when the 5R big win is also made. in short,
A special effect may be executed regardless of the type of jackpot. Thus, as a special performance, when a plurality of types of big wins are provided, it may be executed for some of the types of big wins or may be executed for all types of big wins. Further, when the special performance is executed in the jackpot game state of the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player, the type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player who executes the special performance may be one type or a plurality of types. may

Also, the setting of the jackpot probability and the like is not limited to three types such as set value 1 to set value 3, and may be provided with a large number of set values such as 10 types.

Next, main effects obtained by the characteristic portion 229F will be described.
[1] In the jackpot game state of the 15R jackpot, which is advantageous to the player, of the 15R jackpot and the 5R jackpot, as shown in FIGS. , 15R, a special performance of highlighting the big hit is executed, so that the interest of the performance related to the round of the big win game state can be improved.

[2] As shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A) to (F) and (G) to (L), each round as a predetermined game is in a jackpot game state, and the special variable winning ball device 7 has a big winning opening. is executed a predetermined number of times in the open state, it is possible to further improve the interest of the performance relating to the game round in the jackpot game state.

[3] Since the jackpot game state controlled when the display result of the variable display becomes the big win display result is an advantageous state for the player, the display result of the variable display is changed by executing the special effect. It is possible to improve the interest of the performance in the game state controlled when the big win display result is obtained.

[4] As shown in FIG. 9-1, the interval period between rounds (3 seconds) in the 15R jackpot is longer than the interval period (2 seconds) between rounds in the 5R jackpot, so it is advantageous for a short period of time in the 15R jackpot It is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high due to excessively becoming a state (a state in which a prize can be won).

[5] Like the movable accessories 229F002 and 229F003 in FIGS. 9-1(D) and 9-1(F), during the interval period between each round, the movable role can be moved with the effect type selected from FIG. 9-2. Since the accessory is activated, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the action of the movable accessory during the interval between rounds.

[6] As shown in FIG. 9-2, since the selection ratio of the interval period setting suggestive effect type by the movable accessory differs between the set values 1 to 3, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the movement pattern of the movable object. can.

[7] As shown in FIG. 9-2, the setting value 1 to setting value 3 have different selection ratios of the interval period setting suggesting effect types by the movable accessories, so that the movement patterns of the movable objects can be drawn to attention.

[8] As explained in [Setting Suggestion Effect by Character Image], depending on the type of character image to be displayed with the special effect, one of set values 1 to 3 can be selected as shown in FIG. 9-2. It is possible to suggest whether it is set or not, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the type of the character image.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 229F)
Regarding the above characteristic portion 229F, conventionally, as a game machine that performs round display regarding a round game as a predetermined game multiple times during the jackpot game state as an advantageous state, JP 2016-101442 discloses that be. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2016-101442, there is only a round display for the round game as the predetermined game, and there is room for improvement in the presentation of the predetermined game. Therefore, as a game machine of means 1 related to the characteristic part 230F for providing a game machine that can improve the interest of the performance related to the predetermined game,
A game machine (pachinko game machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player,
The advantageous state is a state formed by repeating a predetermined game (such as opening the special variable winning ball device 7) a plurality of times,
The advantageous state includes at least a first advantageous state (15R jackpot, etc.) and a second advantageous state (5R jackpot, etc.) that is more disadvantageous than the first advantageous state,
In the first advantageous state, a special effect that is not executed in the second advantageous state at the start of the predetermined game (a special effect consisting of an effect that emphasizes that it is a 15R jackpot in FIGS. 9-1 (A) and (D)) etc.) can be executed (characteristic part 229F etc.),
It may be a game machine characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the special effect is executed at the start of the predetermined game, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect related to the predetermined game.

As a game machine of means 2 related to the characteristic part 229F,
The predetermined game is variable winning that can be changed between a first state (open state, etc.) in which game media (game balls, etc.) can win, and a second state (closed state, etc.) in which it is difficult or impossible to win a game medium. Regarding the means (special variable winning ball device 7, etc.), when controlled to the advantageous state, game rounds (rounds, etc.) to control from the second state to the first state are performed a predetermined number of times (15 times, 5 times, etc.) ) is a game to be executed (Fig. 9-1 (A) to (F), (G) to (L), etc.),
The game machine of the means 1 related to the characterizing part 229F characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the presentation related to the game round.

As a game machine of means 3 related to the characteristic part 229F,
The advantageous state is a game state (jackpot game state, etc.) that is controlled when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot display result, etc.).
It may be a game machine of means 1 or means 2 relating to the characteristic part 229F characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the presentation in the game state controlled when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result.

As a game machine of means 4 related to the characteristic part 229F,
The period from the end of the predetermined game in the first advantageous state to the start of the next predetermined game (such as an interval period between rounds of 3 seconds) is from the end of the predetermined game in the second advantageous state. Longer than the period until the start of the next predetermined game (interval period between rounds of 2 seconds, etc.) (FIG. 9-1, etc.),
The game machine according to any one of the means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic part 229F characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from becoming too high due to the first advantageous state being too advantageous in a short period of time.

As a game machine of means 5 related to the characteristic part 229F,
operable movable objects (movable accessories 229F002, 229F003, etc. in FIG. 9-2);
During the period from the end of the predetermined game in the first advantageous state to the start of the next predetermined game (Fig. 9-1 (D), (F) movable accessories 229F002,
229F003 etc.) further comprising movable object operation means,
The game machine according to any one of means 1 to 4 relating to the characteristic part 229F characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the movement of the movable object during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game.

As a game machine of means 6 related to the characteristic part 229F,
The gaming machine is capable of progressing the game so that the degree of advantage (probability of big win, etc.) for the player differs according to the set values (set value 1 to set value 3, etc.) consisting of a plurality of stages,
Depending on the movement pattern of the movable object, it is possible to suggest which set value is set (as shown in FIG. different ratios, etc.),
The game machine of the means 5 related to the characterizing part 229F characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the movement pattern of the movable object.

As a game machine of means 7 related to the characteristic part 229F,
Reservation storage means (RAM 102, etc.) capable of storing information about variable display as reservation storage information;
Determination means (such as S110 in FIG. 5) for determining whether or not to set the advantageous state based on the reserved storage information;
Prior to the determination of the determination means, further comprising a determination means (such as S101 in FIG. 5) for determining whether or not to set the advantageous state,
During the advantageous state, when the holding storage information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is stored in the holding storage means based on the determination result of the determining means, the control is performed to the advantageous state. can be suggested by the motion pattern of the movable object ([Holding consecutive suggestion production by motion pattern of movable role], etc.),
The game machine of the means 5 related to the characterizing part 229F characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the movement pattern of the movable object.

As a game machine of means 8 related to the characteristic part 229F,
The gaming machine is capable of progressing the game so that the degree of advantage for the player differs according to the set values (set value 1 to set value 3, etc.) consisting of a plurality of stages,
Depending on the type of the predetermined image (character image) displayed with the special effect, it is possible to suggest which set value is set ([setting suggestion effect by character image]),
The game machine according to any one of the means 1 to 7 relating to the characteristic part 229F characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the type of the predetermined image.

Note that the control in FIG. 8 and the control in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4 may be applied in combination with each other. That is, the control related to the setting of the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK and the control related to the presentation of the characteristic portion 229F may be combined.

[Description of Characteristic Portion 230F]
Next, the characterizing part 230F of this embodiment will be described. In the characteristic part 230F, the period from the end of a predetermined game such as the end of a round in the jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player to the start of the next predetermined game such as the start of the next round, that is, In the interval period between rounds, an interval period setting suggesting performance for suggesting which of the set values 1 to 3 the set values such as the probability of winning the jackpot are set can be executed by image display. A production control example will be described.

In the characteristic part 229F of the present embodiment, an example of executing an interval period setting suggestion effect by operating the upper movable accessory 229F002 during the interval period between each round in the jackpot game state as shown in FIG. 9-1 showed that. On the other hand, in the characteristic part 230F, during the interval period between each round in the jackpot game state, the character image is displayed on the image display device 5 instead of the movable accessory 229F002 without operating the movable accessory 229F002. , the interval period setting suggestion effect can be executed.

Character images to be displayed on the image display device 5 during the interval period between rounds in order to execute the interval period setting suggesting effect include a character A image to a character D image, which are a plurality of types of character images of different character types. A character image selected from among them is used.

FIG. 9-5 is a diagram showing in tabular form an interval period setting suggestion effect determination table used for selecting a character image to be displayed in the interval period between rounds in the 15R jackpot game state. The interval period setting suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 9-5 is stored in the ROM 121 .

In FIG. 9-5, the correspondence relationship between the type of character image displayed in the interval period setting suggestion effect and the random number allocation (indicated in %) for selecting the interval period setting suggestion effect is set to a set value of 1. , when the setting value is set to 2, and when the setting value is set to 3. The effect selection random number of the interval period setting suggestion effect is a random number for effect selection updated by the effect control CPU 120 .

As shown in FIG. 9-5, the types of character images displayed in the interval period setting suggesting effect are "character A image", "character B image", "character C image", "character D image", and "character D image". All character images (all character images of characters A to D)”.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, the ratio of selection of the setting suggestion effect to display the "character A image" is 90% or more for each of setting value 1, setting value 2, and setting value 3. A setting suggesting effect of displaying the "character A image" is selected at an extremely high rate. As shown in FIG. 9-5, the ratio of selection of the setting suggesting effect for displaying the "character A image" has a relationship of "setting value 1<setting value 2<setting value 3". As a result, when the setting suggestion effect of displaying the "character A image" is performed, the setting value 3 is the highest percentage.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, the ratio of selection of the setting suggestion effect to display the character image other than the setting suggestion effect to display the "character A image" is set to 1, set value 2, and set value 3. is 10% or less for each. The ratio of selecting the setting suggesting effect for displaying the "character B image" has a relationship of "setting value 1<setting value 2<setting value 3". As a result, when the setting suggestion rendering for displaying the "character B image" is performed, the setting value 3 is the highest percentage.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, the ratio of selection of the setting-suggestion rendering for displaying the "character C image" has a relationship of "setting value 3<setting value 1<setting value 2." As a result, when the "character C image" is displayed, the ratio of setting value 2 is the highest. As shown in FIG. 9C, the ratio of selection of the "character D image" has a relationship of "setting value 3<setting value 2<setting value 1". As a result, when the setting suggesting effect of displaying the "character D image" is displayed, the set value 1 is most likely to be set. As shown in FIG. 9-3, the ratio of selection of the setting suggesting effect to display the “image of all characters” has a relationship of “setting value 2, 3<setting value 1”, and setting value 2, 3 is 0 %. As a result, the setting value 1 is determined when the setting suggestion effect for displaying the "image of all characters" is performed.

Then, according to FIG. 9-5, setting suggestion effects other than the setting suggestion effect of displaying the "character A image", the setting suggestion effect of displaying the "character B", the setting suggestion effect of displaying the "character C image", and the setting suggestion effect of the "character D". , and the setting suggestion effect that displays the "image of all characters", the ratio of setting value 2 or setting value 3, which is high setting, is higher than setting value 1, which is low setting. high. As a result, a setting suggestion effect to display a "character B image" other than a setting suggestion effect to display a "character A image", a setting suggestion effect to display a "character C image", and a setting suggestion effect to display a "character D image" When the effect and the setting suggestion effect of displaying the "image of all characters" are respectively displayed, the expectation that the high setting is higher than the low setting is high.

When the type of setting suggestion effect that displays a character image is selected using the interval period setting suggestion effect determination table of FIG. A setting suggesting effect of displaying a "character B image", a setting suggesting effect of displaying a "character C image", and a "character D image" are displayed at a lower frequency than the setting suggesting effect of displaying a "character A image". Either a setting suggesting effect or a setting suggesting effect of displaying an "image of all characters" is executed. Depending on the type of character image, the degree of expectation as to whether or not the setting is high differs, and the degree of expectation as to which of the setting values 1 to 3 corresponds. It is possible to improve the player's expectation for the set value of the big hit or the like. Furthermore, depending on the type of character image, it may be determined that the setting value 1 is the most advantageous for the player. It is possible to further improve the degree of expectation for

In the characterizing part 230F of the present embodiment, the effect setting process at the start of the big hit in FIG. 9-3 and the interval effect setting process in FIG. 9-1(A) to (E), in the production of the 15R jackpot game state shown in FIGS. 9-1(A) to (E), the interval period setting suggestion production during the interval period is performed by using the character image from the production using the movable accessory 229F002. It is possible to execute with the production pattern replaced with the original production.

[Frequency control of setting suggestion effect according to the situation controlled to the jackpot game state]
Next, regarding the interval period setting suggestion effect, an example will be described in which the execution frequency of the effect is changed according to the situation in which the jackpot game state is controlled. As the above-mentioned interval period setting suggesting effect, an example is shown which is always executed in the interval period of each round. However, not limited to this, for each round, whether or not to execute the interval period setting suggestion effect is selected by lottery, and when the lottery result is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-2 or 9-5 The interval period setting suggesting effect determination table may be used to select the effect type of the interval period setting suggesting effect during the interval period. In that case, as follows, the execution frequency of the effect may be changed according to the situation in which the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. For example, the current time is confirmed by a timekeeping means such as a real-time clock provided in the pachinko game machine, and during a predetermined period when the amusement hall opens (so-called first thing in the morning), an interval period setting suggestion effect is performed rather than during other periods. You may choose to run a higher percentage. In addition, in pachinko game machines, the number of consecutive games (the number of times a big hit has occurred consecutively), for example, an event in which a big hit occurs during a special game state after the big win game state, such as a variable probability state or a time saving state Consecutive number of times) may be counted, and as the number of consecutive times increases, the ratio of selecting execution of the interval period setting suggesting effect may be increased.

[Setting suggestion production in the interval period between specific rounds]
The setting-suggestion effects (effects by movable accessories, effects by character images) to be executed in the interval period between rounds shown in the characteristic part 229F and the characteristic part 230F are shown to be executed between each round (between all rounds). . However, even if the setting suggestion effect executed in the interval period between the rounds is executed only in the interval period between the 5R and 6R rounds, for example, during some rounds among all the rounds. good.

As the interval period setting suggestion effect, at least one of the effect by the action of the movable accessory as shown in FIG. 9-1 and the effect by image display such as the character image as shown in FIG. 9-5 may be executed. Therefore, as the effect suggesting setting of the interval period, it is possible to select any one of the effect only by the action of the movable role, the effect only by the image display, and the effect combining the action of the movable role and the image display. may be executed.

As an example of executing the interval period setting suggestion effect using a character image, the effect using a plurality of different types of character images has been shown. An effect suggesting the set value may be produced by making the character operate in different types of motion modes and varying the selection ratio of a plurality of types of motion modes according to the set value for one character image.

Next, main effects obtained by the characteristic portion 230F will be described.
[1] During the interval period between rounds in the jackpot gaming state, as a setting suggestion effect which setting value is set to which setting value 1 to 3 is set, the movable role shown in Fig. 9-1 and Fig. 9-2 9-1(C) and (E), the setting value It is possible to improve the amusement of performance during the interval period between rounds of the pachinko game machine 1 provided with.

As described above, a plurality of movable accessories are provided, and depending on the combination of actions of the accessories, an effect may be executed that suggests whether the set value of the probability of a big hit is even or odd. For example, when the set values range from set value 1 to set value 6, if two movable accessories are operated, it is suggested that the set values are odd-numbered settings such as set value 1, set value 3, and set value 5. However, if four movable accessories are operated, even-numbered settings such as setting value 2, setting value 4, and setting value 6 may be suggested.

[2] In FIGS. 9-2 and 9-5, since the selection ratio of multiple types of setting suggestion effects differs according to setting values 1 to 3, the player can be made to pay attention to the type of setting suggestion effects. , the interest in the game can be further improved.

[3] As shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A) to (F), 229FS007, etc. in FIG. 9-4, control to the jackpot game state of the 15R jackpot, which is more advantageous for the player, between the 15R jackpot and the 5R jackpot. Since the interval period setting suggesting performance is executed when the game is being played, attention can be paid to the performance executed when the game is controlled to the big win game state of the 15R big win.

[4] As shown in FIGS. 9-1(A) and 9-1(D), a special effect consisting of an effect highlighting the 15R jackpot can be executed at the start of the round. It is possible to further improve the interest of the production.

[5] As shown in FIG. 9-1, the interval period (3 seconds) between rounds in the 15R jackpot is longer than the interval period (2 seconds) between rounds in the 5R jackpot, so it is advantageous for a short period of time in the 15R jackpot It is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high due to excessively becoming a state (a state in which a prize can be won).

[6] As shown in [Frequency control of setting suggestion effect according to the state of being controlled to the jackpot game state], the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is different depending on the situation when the jackpot game state is controlled. Since the situation when the jackpot game state is controlled is also added to the performance, the interest in the game can be further improved.

[7] As shown in [execution frequency control of setting suggestion effect according to the situation controlled to the jackpot gaming state], in the interval period between specific rounds, such as between the rounds of 5R and 6R, the interval period Since the suggestive effect can be executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect between specific rounds.

[8] As shown in FIG. 9-6, which will be described later, an effect suggesting over winning may be executed in relation to over winning in each round. In that case, it is possible to improve the interest of the performance when the special variable winning ball device 7 wins the game balls that are more than the upper limit of the winning number in each round.
[9] As shown in [Example of execution of over winning setting suggestion effect in interval period between rounds] described later, when over winning setting suggesting effect is also executed, interval period setting suggesting effect and over winning setting suggesting effect By making it possible to execute any setting suggestion effect when the execution period of and overlaps, each setting suggestion effect is reliably executed even if the execution timing of multiple setting suggestion effects overlaps. , can improve the interest of the game.

Note that the control in FIG. 8 and the control in FIG. 9-5 may be applied in combination with each other. In other words, the control related to the setting of the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK and the control related to the rendering of the characteristic portion 230F may be combined.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 230F)
Regarding the characteristic portion 230F described above, there is a game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 as a conventional game machine in which setting values can be changed. In addition, as a game machine that executes an effect during an interval period from the end of a round game as a predetermined game a plurality of times during the jackpot game state as an advantageous state to the start of the next round game, JP 2013 -252283 discloses. However, in the techniques described in JP-A-2010-200902 and JP-A-2013-252283, during the period from the end of a predetermined game of the gaming machine provided with the set value to the start of the next predetermined game, There was room for improvement in terms of performance. Therefore, the characteristic part 230F for providing a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the performance during the period from the end of the predetermined game in which the set value is provided to the start of the next predetermined game is provided. As a game machine of means 1,
A game machine (pachinko game machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player,
Setting means (game control microcomputer 100, etc.) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values,
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100, etc.) capable of progressing the game so that the degree of advantage (jackpot probability, etc.) for the player differs based on the set set values (set value 1 to set value 3, etc.) and
The advantageous state is a state formed by repeating a predetermined game (such as opening the special variable winning ball device 7) a plurality of times,
During the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (interval period between rounds), a setting suggestion effect (Fig. 9-1, Fig. 9-
9-1 (C), interval period setting suggesting effect for moving the movable accessory in 2, interval period setting suggesting effect for displaying the character image in FIG. 9-5, etc.). (E) etc.),
It may be a game machine characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the performance during the period from the end of the predetermined game of the gaming machine provided with the set value to the start of the next predetermined game.

As a game machine of means 2 related to the characteristic part 230F,
The execution ratio of the plurality of types of setting suggestion effects provided in accordance with the setting value differs (in FIGS. different, etc.),
The game machine of the means 1 related to the characterizing part 230F characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of setting suggestion effect, thereby improving the interest of the game.

As a game machine of means 3 related to the characteristic part 230F,
The advantageous state includes at least a first advantageous state (15R jackpot, etc.) and a second advantageous state (5R jackpot, etc.) that is more disadvantageous than the first advantageous state,
It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect when the first advantageous state (FIGS. 9-1 (A) to (F), 229FS007 in FIG. 9-4, etc.),
It may be a game machine of means 1 or means 2 relating to the characteristic part 230F characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect that is executed when the first advantageous state is being controlled.

As a game machine of means 4 related to the characteristic part 230F,
In the first advantageous state, a special effect can be executed at the start of the predetermined game (FIGS. 9-1 (A), (D), etc.),
The game machine of the means 3 related to the characterizing part 230F characterized by:
According to such a configuration, since the special effect is executed at the start of the predetermined game, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect related to the predetermined game.

As a game machine of means 5 related to the characteristic part 230F,
The period from the end of the predetermined game in the first advantageous state to the start of the next predetermined game (such as an interval period between rounds of 3 seconds) is from the end of the predetermined game in the second advantageous state. Longer than the period until the start of the next predetermined game (interval period between rounds of 2 seconds, etc.) (FIG. 9-1, etc.),
It may be a gaming machine of means 3 or 4 relating to the characteristic part 230F characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from becoming too high due to the first advantageous state being too advantageous in a short period of time.

As a game machine of means 6 related to the characteristic part 230F,
The execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on the situation when the advantageous state is controlled ([execution frequency control of the setting suggestion effect according to the situation controlled to the jackpot game state]),
It may be a game machine of means 1 to 5 relating to the characteristic part 230F characterized by:
According to such a configuration, since the situation when the control is in an advantageous state is taken into account, the interest in the game is improved.

As a game machine of means 7 related to the characteristic part 230F,
During the period from the end of a specific predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (for example, the interval period between rounds between 5R and 6R), the setting suggestion effect can be executed ([ Setting suggestion production in the interval period between specific rounds], etc.),
It may be a game machine of means 1 to 6 relating to the characteristic part 230F characterized by:
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the period from the end of a specific predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game.

As a game machine of means 8 related to the characteristic part 230F,
variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7, etc.),
Variable winning control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the variable winning means from the first state to the second state when a predetermined number (the upper limit of the winning number) of game media is won in the variable winning means. and
The setting suggesting effect can be executed in relation to the fact that game media greater than the predetermined number have won the variable winning means (over winning) (over winning setting suggesting effect in FIG. 9-6),
It may be a game machine of means 1 to 6 relating to the characteristic part 230F characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the presentation when game media more than the predetermined number win the variable winning means.

As a game machine of means 9 related to the characteristic part 230F,
The setting suggesting effect (interval period setting suggesting effect, etc.) executed during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (interval period between rounds, etc.), and more than the predetermined number When the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect (over winning setting suggestion effect, etc.) executed in relation to the game medium winning the variable winning means (over winning, etc.) overlaps, any of the setting suggestions Effect can also be executed ([execution example of over winning setting suggestion effect in interval period between rounds]),
The game machine of the means 8 related to the characterizing part 230F characterized by:
According to such a configuration, even when execution timings of a plurality of setting suggesting effects overlap, each setting suggesting effect is reliably executed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Description of Characteristic Portion 231F]
Next, the characterizing part 231F of this embodiment will be described. In each round of the jackpot game state, the big winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened, and the game ball can win the special variable winning ball device 7.例文帳に追加For each round in the jackpot game state, an upper limit is set for the number of winning balls into the special variable winning ball device 7. When the number of winning balls reaches the upper limit, the big winning opening is closed, but the number of winning balls is set to the upper limit. In each round, winning exceeding the upper limit may occur due to game balls that have won before it is determined that it has become.

Winning of game balls exceeding the upper limit of the winning number in each round is called over-winning. When it is determined that over-winning has occurred, it is possible to execute over-winning performance, which is a specific performance related to the occurrence of over-winning, such as notifying that over-winning has occurred. As the over-winning effect, a plurality of types of over-winning effect are provided, and the type of over-winning effect is selected each time an over-winning effect occurs for each round, and the effect control for executing the selected over-winning effect Executed by the CPU 120 .

In the characteristic part 231F, in addition to the fact that an over-winning has occurred as an over-winning effect, there is an over-winning that can indicate which of the set values 1 to 3 the set values such as the probability of winning the jackpot are set to. A winning setting suggesting effect is executed, and for the over winning setting suggesting effect, the execution ratio (selection ratio) of the effect provided for the effect type is different according to the set values 1 to 3 of the probability of winning the jackpot, etc. will be explained. . Such an over winning setting suggesting effect is executed during the interval period between rounds immediately after the occurrence of the over winning.

FIG. 9-6 is a display screen view of the image display device 5 showing an example of an over winning setting suggesting effect related to the characterizing portion 231F.

In FIG. 9-6, (A) to (C) show the effect mode of the over winning setting suggestion effect in the image display device 5 when the set value 3, which is the low setting, is set, and (D) to (C). (F) shows an effect mode of the over winning setting suggestion effect in the image display device 5 when the set value 1, which is a high setting, is set.

As shown in (A) to (C) and (D) to (F), when the setting suggestion effect is executed during the interval period between rounds, a predetermined character image 231F001 is displayed and the character image is displayed. A normal image 231F002 displaying the words "Lucky!", a high setting suggestion image 231F003 displaying the words "Chance!", and the words "Excellent!" The over winning setting suggestion image selected from among the high setting confirmed images 231F004 is displayed.

As for these over-winning-setting suggestive images, as shown in FIG. 9-7, which will be described later, the degree of expectation, which is a high setting such as setting value 1 and setting value 2, is such that “normal image 231F002 (“Lucky!”)<high setting The selection ratio is set such that the suggested image 231F003 (“Chance!”) <the high-setting confirmed image 231F004 (“Excellent!”). In particular, the high setting confirmation image 231F004 (“excellent!”) is an over winning setting suggestion image that confirms the high setting.

In FIG. 9-6, for example, when one over winning is detected during one round, one over winning is detected as shown in (A) and (D). , one over winning setting suggesting image of any type selected as described above is displayed. (A) and (B) show a display example when the normal image 231F002 is selected.

In FIG. 9-6, for example, when two over-wins are detected during one round, two over-wins are detected as shown in (B) and (E). , two over winning setting suggestion images of any type selected as described above are displayed. (B) shows a display example when the normal image 231F002 is selected corresponding to each of the two over-wins and displayed in order of winning. In (E), after the high setting suggestion image 231F003 is selected and displayed in response to the first over-winning, the normal image 231F002 is selected and displayed in response to the second over-winning. is shown.

In FIG. 9-6, for example, when three over-wins are detected during one round, three over-wins are detected as shown in (C) and (F). , three over-winning setting suggestion images of any type selected as described above are displayed. (C) shows a display example when the normal image 231F002 is selected corresponding to each of the three over-wins and displayed in order of winning. In (F), after the high setting confirmed image 231F004 is selected and displayed corresponding to the first over-winning, the normal image 231F002 is selected corresponding to each of the second and third over-winning. A display example is shown when the prizes are displayed in order of winning.

Over Win 3 with 3 over wins detected in one round as shown in Figure 9-6
At the time of the second, as shown in (C) and (F), three over winning setting suggestion images of any kind selected as described above corresponding to each of the three over winnings is displayed. In FIG. 9-6, when the high setting suggestion image 231F003 is displayed as in (E) or (F), the expectation of the high setting is higher than when only the normal image 231F002 is displayed, so the game is played. It can improve people's expectations. Furthermore, when the high setting confirmation image 231F004 is displayed, it is confirmed that the high setting is set, so the player's expectation can be further improved.

As for the over-winning setting suggestive effect, the effect is executed in the effect mode combining the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission from the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and the image display by the image display device 5. You may do so. In addition, with respect to the over-winning setting suggestion effect, it is possible to execute an effect based on a combination of all or part of such sound, light emission, and image, such as sound only, light emission only, or image only. You may perform the production|presentation by a stand-alone production|presentation means. In the case of executing the effect suggesting the setting of the over-winning prize using the light-emitting body, the light-emitting means such as a lamp provided at a predetermined position (for example, the position around the special variable prize-winning ball device 7 having the big prize winning opening) is turned on for the big win. Depending on the aforementioned set values such as probability, different colors (and possibly different light emitting patterns, such as different blinking patterns) may be illuminated.

FIG. 9-7 is a diagram showing, in tabular form, an over winning setting suggestion effect determination table used for selecting the type of setting suggesting effect (type of over winning setting suggesting image) to be executed as the over winning setting suggesting effect. be. The over winning setting suggestion effect determination table is stored in the ROM 121 .

In FIG. 9-7, the over winning setting suggestion effect determination table is used when the setting value is 1, and the first over winning setting suggestion effect determination table (FIG. 9-7 (A)) used when the setting value is 2. Second over winning setting suggestion effect determination table (Fig. 9-7 (B)) used for the second over winning prize setting suggestion effect determination table (Fig. 9-7 (C)) used when the set value is 3 )including. In these over winning setting suggestion effect determination tables, the effect type of over winning setting suggesting effect (type of over winning setting suggesting image), the number of over winnings, and the allocation of random numbers for selecting over winning setting suggesting effect (displayed in %) ) is set. The random number for effect selection suggesting over winning a prize setting of the effect is a random number for effect selection which is updated by the effect control CPU 120 .

As shown in each table of FIGS. 9-7 (A) to (C), the type of the over winning setting suggestion image displayed in the over winning setting suggestion effect is that the type of the over winning setting suggestion image is "normal image display". ', 'display high setting suggestion image', and 'display high setting final image'.

As shown in FIGS. 9-7 (A) to (C), the ratio of selection of the setting suggestion effect to "display normal image" is set value 1, set value 2, and set value 3 respectively. It is 89% or more, and basically the setting suggestion effect of "displaying a normal image" is selected at an extremely high rate. As shown in FIGS. 9-2 (A) to (C), the ratio of selection of the setting suggestion effect that "displays a normal image" has a relationship of "setting value 1 < setting value 2, setting value 3". be. As a result, when the setting suggestion effect of "displaying a normal image" is performed, the ratio of the setting value 3 is the highest. On the other hand, at least one of the setting suggestion effect of "displaying a high setting suggestion image" other than the setting suggestion effect of "displaying a normal image" and the setting suggestion effect of "displaying a high setting confirmed image" is selected is 11% or less in setting values 1 to 3.

As shown in FIGS. 9-7 (A) to (C), the ratio of selection of the setting suggesting effect that "displays a high setting suggesting image" is "setting value 2>setting value 1>setting value 3". There is a relationship. Therefore, when the setting suggestion effect of "displaying a high setting suggestion image" is performed, the ratio of setting value 1 or setting value 2 is higher than the ratio of setting value 3. Thus, when the setting suggestion effect of "displaying a high setting suggestion image" is performed in the over winning setting suggestion effect, the player's expectation for the high setting can be enhanced.

As shown in FIGS. 9-7 (A) to (C), the ratio of selection of the setting suggestion effect that "displays the high setting confirmed image" is "setting value 1 > setting value 2 > setting value 3". There is a relationship, and with setting 3, the selection rate is 0%. Therefore, when a setting suggestion effect of "displaying a high setting confirmed image" is given in the over winning setting suggestion effect, the set value 1 or the set value 2 is decided. As a result, when the setting suggestion effect of "displaying the high setting confirmed image" is performed in the over winning setting suggestion effect, the player's expectation for the high setting can be further heightened. Furthermore, the ratio of selection of the setting suggestion effect to "display high setting confirmed image" has a relationship of "setting value 1 > setting value 2", so "high setting confirmed image display" with over winning setting suggestion effect , the player's expectation for the set value 1 can be heightened.

As shown in FIGS. 9-7 (A) to (C), as the number of over-winning prizes increases, the first over-winning setting suggestion effect determination table (A) used when the set value is 1, which is a high setting, is used. And the second over winning setting suggestion effect determination table of (B) used when the setting value is 2 which is a high setting, and the 3rd over winning setting suggestion of (C) used when the setting value is 2 which is a low setting Compared to the effect determination table, the data is such that the ratio of the effect of displaying a high setting suggesting image and the effect of displaying a high setting confirmed suggesting image increases as the number of over winnings increases. is set. Thus, as the number of over winnings increases, the reliability of the set value suggesting effect by the over winning setting suggesting effect increases.

As shown in FIGS. 9-7 (A) to (C), as the number of over-winning prizes increases, the ratio of selecting the setting suggestion effect of “displaying the high setting confirmed image” increases, and the “high setting Since the data is set so that the ratio of selection of the setting suggestion effect "displaying the setting confirmed image" is high, as the number of over-winning prizes increases, the interest of the effect increases, and the player's response to the high setting increases. can raise the expectations of

FIG. 9-8 is a flow chart showing the command analysis process (S75) in FIG. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a new received command by checking the data in the effect control command reception buffer (231FS001). If there is a new received command (Y at 231FS001), the effect control CPU 120 moves to 231FS002. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the process when there is no new received command.

At 231FS002, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a large winning opening winning notification command as a new received command. When there is a big winning entry winning notification (Y in 231FS002), the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the count value of the big winning entry winning frequency counter (large winning entry winning frequency count value) (231FS003), and A winning prize flag is set (231FS004), and the process proceeds to 231FS005.

The large winning opening winning notification command is an effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 for each winning detection when it is detected that a game ball has entered the large winning opening. The number of winning openings counter is a counting means for counting the number of winning game balls to the winning openings in each round. The number of times of prize winning openings counter is initialized at the start of each round, so that the number of prize winnings to the big winning openings in each round can be counted.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, when there is no large winning opening winning notification command as a new received command, that is, when another command is newly received (N in 231FS002), responds to the received command Settings related to the effect are made (231FS011), and the process ends.

At 231FS005, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not over-winning has occurred by comparing the count value of the number of winnings at the big winning opening updated at 231FS005 with the upper limit of the number of winnings set for each round. judge. When over winning occurs (Y at 231FS005), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to 231FS006. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the process when over winning does not occur (N in 231FS005). At 231FS006, the effect control CPU 120 compares the count value of the number of times of winning prizes updated at 231FS005 with the upper limit value of the number of winning prizes set for each round, and the number of over winning prizes is 1. Determine whether or not When the number of over winnings is one (Y in 231FS006), the effect control CPU 120 sets the first over winning flag and ends the process. If the number of over winnings is not one (N at 231FS006), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to 231FS008.

At 231FS008, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there are two over-wins by comparing the count value of the number of wins at the big winning opening updated at 231FS005 with the upper limit of the number of wins set for each round. determine whether When there are two over-wins (Y at 231FS008), the effect control CPU 120 sets the second over-wins flag (231FS009) and ends the process. If the number of over-wins is not two, that is, if there are three or more over-wins (N in 231FS008), the effect control CPU 120 sets the third over-win flag (231FS010) and ends the process. .

FIG. 9-9 is a flow chart showing over winning processing. The over-winning process is performed as a part of the process during the big hit (S176) in FIG.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the big winning opening winning flag set in FIG. 9-8 is set (231FS020). When the big winning opening flag is set (Y at 231FS020), the effect control CPU 120 resets the big winning opening winning flag (231FS021) and shifts to 231FS022. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 ends the process when the big winning opening winning flag is not set (N at 231FS020).

At 231FS022, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not any one of the first to third over winning flags that can be set in the command analysis process of FIG. 9-8 is set. If any over winning flag is set (Y at 231FS022), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to 231FS023. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the process when none of the over winning flags is set (N at 231FS022).

At 231FS023, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first over winning flag is set. When the first over winning flag is set (Y in 231FS023), the effect control CPU 120 extracts the random number for selecting the effect of the over winning setting suggestion effect, and extracts the first over winning of FIG. 9-7(A). Based on the setting suggesting effect determination table, the type of over winning setting suggesting effect at the time of one over winning is determined (231FS024), and the process proceeds to 231FS028. On the other hand, when the first over winning flag is not set (N at 231FS023), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to 231FS025.

At 231FS025, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second over winning flag is set. When the second over winning flag is set (Y in 231FS025), the effect control CPU 120 extracts the random number for selecting the effect of the over winning setting suggestion effect, and the second over winning of FIG. 9-7 (B). Based on the setting suggesting effect determination table, the type of over winning setting suggesting effect at the time of two over winnings is determined (231FS026), and the process proceeds to 231FS028. On the other hand, when the second over winning flag is not set, that is, when the third over winning flag is set (N in 231FS025), the effect control CPU 120 selects a random number for selecting the effect of the over winning setting suggestion effect. is extracted, and based on the third over winning setting suggesting effect determination table of FIG.

At 231FS028, the effect control CPU 120 resets the set over winning flag. Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the type of over winning setting suggesting effect determined in 231FS024, 231FS026 or 231FS027 to display an over winning setting suggesting image as shown in FIG. 9-6 (231FS029). , terminate the process.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 executes the over winning setting suggestion effect as shown in FIG. 9-6 by executing the over winning process shown in FIG. 9-9. The over winning setting suggesting effect is executed at the time of occurrence each time over winning occurs.

[Example of effect suggesting over-winning setting based on the number of balls paid out due to over-winning]
As shown in FIG. 9-7, the above-mentioned over-winning setting suggesting effect is an example in which the selection ratio of a plurality of types of setting-suggesting effects is changed according to the number of game balls that have won over (the number of over winnings). However, as shown in Fig. 9-7, the over-winning setting suggestion effect is based on the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of over-winning game balls (the total number of prize balls based on the over-winning in each round). value), the selection ratio of a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects may be varied. For example, in Fig. 9-7, "1 over winning ball" is replaced with "15 over winning balls", etc., "2 over winning balls" is replaced with "30 over winning balls", etc., and "3 over winning balls" are replaced. "pieces" may be replaced with "45 or more over-winning prize balls" or the like. In this example, as the number of awarded balls paid out due to over winning increases, the reliability of the over winning setting suggestion effect based on the number of awarded balls paid out due to over winning increases.

[Example of execution of over-winning setting suggestion effect in interval period between rounds]
The above-mentioned over winning setting suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect (effect by movable accessories, effect by character image) executed in the interval period between the rounds shown in the characteristic part 229F and the characteristic part 230F are the same during the jackpot game state. may be executed to In that case, the over winning setting suggesting effect may be executed in the interval period between rounds after the round in which the over winning has occurred. In the case of performing such an effect, during the interval period between the rounds, the conditions for executing the setting suggestion effect to be executed in the interval period between the rounds shown in the feature part 229F and the feature part 230F, and the execution of the over winning setting suggestion effect. It is also conceivable that the condition may be met in such a manner that the execution timings of both setting suggestion effects overlap during the interval period between rounds. When such execution periods overlap, both setting suggestion effects may be executed in parallel at overlapping timings. When such execution periods overlap, if both setting suggestion effects are executed in parallel at overlapping timings, areas related to effects such as the display range of images of both setting suggestion effects and the movement range of movable roles You may make it not overlap, and you may make it overlap.

When the execution periods overlap, either one of the setting suggestion effects may be preferentially executed, or one of the setting suggestion effects may be selected and executed by lottery.

[Execution example of over winning setting suggestion effect in ending effect]
In the ending effect process (S177) of FIG. 7, when the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big win game state is executed, the over winning setting suggesting effect may be executed. For example, an effect of adding and updating the number of payout balls based on the over winning in all rounds of the big win game state is performed, and in the ending effect, all rounds in the big win game state such as ``the number of over winning payout prize balls is 120''. It is also possible to display the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the over-winning through. In that case, a plurality of types of display colors for the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the over winning may be provided, and the selection ratio of the display colors may differ depending on the set values (set values 1 to 3). In this way, the over-win setting suggestion effect can be executed by the display color of the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the over-win.

[Suggestion of over-winning setting during the interval period between specific rounds]
The setting suggesting effects (effects by movable accessories, effects by character images) executed in the interval period between the rounds described above are executed between each round (between all rounds). However, the setting suggestion effect executed in the interval period between the rounds, for example, is executed only in the interval period between the rounds of 5R and 6R for over-winning in 5R. It may be executed only in

Next, main effects obtained by the characteristic portion 231F will be described.
[1] As shown in FIG. 9-6, when an over-winning occurs in each round in the jackpot game state, as a setting suggestion effect as to which setting value is set from setting value 1 to setting value 3, Since the over winning setting suggesting performance can be executed, the interest of the over winning setting suggesting performance of the pachinko game machine 1 provided with the set value can be improved.

[2] Since the selection ratio of a plurality of types of setting suggesting effects differs according to the number of over winnings and the number of over winnings, the player can be made to pay attention to the types of setting suggesting effects.

[3] As described in [Example of effect of suggesting over winnings based on the number of awarded balls paid out due to over winnings], suggestion of setting over winnings based on the number of paid out prize balls due to over winnings according to the number of awarded balls paid out due to over winnings. Since the reliability of the performance is different, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the number of prize balls to be paid out due to over winning.

[4] As indicated by 231FS023 to 231FS029 in FIG. 9-9, the over-win setting suggesting effect is executed each time an over-win occurs. can be made

[5] As shown in FIG. 9-7, depending on the number of over-wins at the end of the jackpot game state, the reliability of the over-win setting suggestive effect differs depending on the number of over-wins. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect at the end of the game state.

[6] As shown in the example of the effect suggesting over winning setting in the interval period between rounds in FIG. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the performance.

Note that the control in FIG. 8 and the control in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-9 may be applied in combination with each other. That is, the control related to the setting of the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK and the control related to the rendering of the characteristic portion 231F may be combined.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 231F)
Regarding the characteristic part 231F described above, there is a game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 as a conventional game machine in which setting values can be changed. In addition, during a jackpot game as an advantageous state, when the maximum number of winnings occurs in the big winning opening (when a so-called over winning occurs), as a gaming machine that can execute a specific effect, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-193271 Some are listed in the publication. However, the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-193271 have room for improvement with regard to the specific effects caused by over-winning of gaming machines provided with set values. Therefore, as a game machine of means 1 related to the characteristic part 231F for providing a game machine that can improve the interest of the specific performance in the game machine provided with the set value,
A game machine (pachinko game machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player,
Setting means (game control microcomputer 100, etc.) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values,
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100, etc.) capable of progressing the game so that the degree of advantage (jackpot probability, etc.) for the player differs based on the set set values (set value 1 to set value 3, etc.) and
variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7, etc.),
Variable winning control means (game control microcomputer) for controlling the variable winning means from the first state to the second state when a predetermined number (the upper limit of the number of winning prizes) of game media has been won in the variable winning means 100 etc.),
A specific effect (over winning setting suggesting effect in FIG. 9-6) can be executed in relation to the fact that game media greater than the predetermined number have won the variable winning means (over winning),
The execution ratio of the plurality of types of specific effects provided differs according to the set value (in FIG. 9-7, the selection ratio of multiple types of setting suggestion effects differs depending on set values 1 to 3, etc.),
It may be a game machine characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the specific effect in the gaming machine provided with the set value.

As a game machine of means 2 related to the characteristic part 231F,
The execution ratio of the specific effect differs depending on the number of times game media win more than the predetermined number (the number of over-wins, the number of over-wins). The selection ratio of the production is different, etc.),
The game machine of the means 1 related to the characterizing part 231F characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the number of executions of the specific effect.

As a game machine of means 3 related to the characteristic part 231F,
The specific effect is executed in accordance with the number of game media acquired (the number of prize balls paid out due to over winning, etc.) based on the winning of game media greater than the predetermined number. Reliability of winning setting suggestion effect, etc.) are different ([Example of over winning setting suggestion effect based on the number of prize balls paid out due to over winning], etc.)
The game machine of the means 1 related to the characterizing part 231F characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the number of acquired game media.

As a game machine of means 4 related to the characteristic part 231F,
The specific effect is executed each time game media greater than the predetermined number are won (FIG. 9-6, 231FS023 to 231FS029 in FIG. 9-9, etc.),
The game machine of the means 1 related to the characterizing part 231F characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention every time game media that are more than the predetermined number are won.

As a game machine of means 5 related to the characteristic part 231F,
The specific effect is executed according to the number of times game media win more than the predetermined number at the end of the advantageous state (the number of over-wins, etc.) is different ([Execution example of over winning setting suggestion effect in ending effect]),
The game machine of the means 1 related to the characterizing part 231F characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the end of the advantageous state.

As a game machine of means 6 related to the characteristic part 231F,
The advantageous state is a state formed by repeating a predetermined game (such as opening the special variable winning ball device 7) a plurality of times,
During the period from the end of a specific predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (interval period between rounds), the specific effect can be executed (overtime in the interval period between rounds in FIG. 9-6). Winning setting suggestion production example),
It may be a game machine of means 1 to 5 relating to the characteristic part 231F characterized by:
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the period from the end of a specific predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game.

[Description of Characteristic Portion 232F]
Next, the characteristic portion 232F of this embodiment will be described. During the jackpot game state, game balls can be won in the special variable winning ball device 7, and a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out for each winning. The number of paid-out prize balls corresponding to the winning to the special variable winning ball device 7 during the big win game state is the number of game balls won by the player in the big win game state, and is called the winning number.

During the jackpot game state, every time one winning game ball to the special variable winning ball device 7 is detected, the main board 11 sends the effect control board 12 a big winning opening notification command as a effect control command. sent. The effect control CPU 120 adds and updates the number of predetermined prize balls to be paid out per one winning ball into the big winning hole every time the command for notifying the winning of the big winning hole is received. An operation is performed to add and update the number of game balls acquired by the player during the game state. The number of game balls acquired during the game state is performed in units of one big win game state. When the number of game balls acquired during the jackpot game state exceeds a predetermined specific number (for example, every 1000), an acquisition number notification effect indicating the number of acquisitions is executed.

In the characteristic part 232F, during the jackpot game state, in addition to indicating the number of game balls obtained when the number of game balls obtained during the jackpot game state exceeds a specific number, as the winning number notification effect, the above-mentioned jackpot winning is indicated. An acquisition number setting suggestion performance capable of suggesting which of the set values 1 to 3 a set value such as a probability is set is executed, and the set value such as the winning probability of a big win is executed for the acquisition number setting suggestion performance. An example will be described in which the execution ratio (selection ratio) of the effects provided for the type of effects differs according to 1 to 3. FIG.

FIGS. 9-10 are display screen diagrams of the image display device 5 showing an example of the performance indicating the setting of the number of acquisitions associated with the characterizing portion 232F.

In FIGS. 9-10, (A) to (C) show the effect mode of the acquisition number setting suggestion effect in the image display device 5 when the setting value 3, which is a low setting, is set, and (D) to (C) (F) shows an effect mode of the acquisition number setting suggestion effect when the set value 1, which is a high setting, is set. The specific number for which the acquisition number setting suggestion effect is executed is set for each 1000 pieces, such as 1000 pieces, 2000 pieces, 3000 pieces, and so on. Therefore, for every 1000 pieces, when the specified number is exceeded, the effect image of the acquisition number setting suggestion effect is displayed.

As shown in (A)-(C) and (D)-(F), in the acquisition number setting suggesting effect, for example, as shown in (A), (D), "2000 OVER", (B), Winning number image 232F001 showing the number of game balls won, such as "5000 shots OVER" as shown in (E) and "10000 shots OVER" as shown in (C) and (F), and a first character image Character images 232F002, 232F003, 232F004, 232F005, .

Regarding the character images displayed in the acquisition number setting suggesting effect, as shown in FIGS. The selection ratio is set so that the expectation level (setting value 1, setting value 2) has a relationship of "first character image<second character image<third character image<fourth character image<fifth character image". It is In particular, the fifth character image is a character image of the number-of-obtains-setting suggesting effect in which it is determined that the first set value, which is a high setting, is set.

The acquisition number setting suggesting effect is executed each time the acquisition number exceeds 1000, and a character image to be displayed is selected at the time of execution. Accordingly, as shown in (A) to (C) and (D) to (F), the character image displayed as the obtained number setting suggestion effect may differ each time the obtained number setting suggestion effect is executed.

FIG. 9-11 is a diagram showing, in tabular form, an acquisition number setting suggestion effect determination table used for selecting the effect type (character image type) of the setting suggestion effect to be executed as the acquisition number setting suggestion effect. The acquisition number setting suggestion effect determination table is stored in the ROM 121 .

In FIG. 9-11, the acquisition number setting suggestion effect determination table is used when the setting value is 1. The first acquisition number setting suggestion effect determination table (FIG. 9-11 (A)) is used when the setting value is 2. Second winning number setting suggestion effect determination table used (Fig. 9-11(B)), and third winning number setting suggestion effect determination table used when the set value is 3 (Fig. 9-11(C)) including. In these acquisition number setting suggestion effect determination tables, the correspondence relationship between the type of character image displayed in the acquisition number setting suggestion effect, the acquisition number range, and the random number allocation (displayed as a percentage) for selecting the character image of the effect is set. The character image selection random number is a random number for effect selection updated by the effect control CPU 120 .

As shown in each table of FIGS. 9-11 (A) to (C), the types of character images displayed in the setting suggestion effect for setting the acquisition number setting suggestion effect are "display of the first character image", "second "display of character image", "display of third character image", "display of fourth character image", and "display of fifth character image".

As shown in FIGS. 9-11 (A) to (C), the setting suggestion effect of "displaying the fifth character image" can be selected at setting value 1, but can be selected at setting value 2 and setting value 3. Impossible. Therefore, when the setting suggestion effect of displaying the fifth character image is performed, the setting value 1 is confirmed, so that the player's expectation for the setting value 1 can be enhanced.

As shown in FIG. 9-11(C), at a low setting such as the setting value 3, the selection ratio of each of the setting suggestion effects for displaying the first character image to the fourth character image is the same. As shown in 9-11 (A) and (B), the setting suggestion effect selection ratio for displaying the first character image to the fourth character image at high settings such as setting value 1 and setting value 2 is "second A setting suggesting effect for displaying one character image < a setting suggesting effect for displaying a second character image < a setting suggesting effect for displaying a third character image < a setting suggesting effect for displaying a fourth character image. is set.

Therefore, the setting suggestion effect for displaying the first character image to the fourth character image differs in the ratio of selection at the high setting due to such a ratio relationship. As a result, the player's expectation for the high setting can be heightened according to the type of character image displayed in the acquisition number setting suggesting effect. For example, when the fourth character image is displayed in the acquisition number setting suggesting effect, the player's expectation for the high setting can be heightened more than when the first character image is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (C), at a low setting such as the setting value 3, regardless of the number of acquisitions, each of the setting suggestion effects that display the first character image to the fourth character image Although the selection ratio is the same, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 (A) and (B), the setting suggestion effect and A relationship of "1000 to 3000 shots<4000 to 9000 shots<10000 shots or more" is set for the selection ratio of the setting suggestive effect for displaying the fourth character image.

As shown in FIGS. 9-11 (A) to (C), as the number of acquisitions increases, the first acquisition number setting suggestion effect determination table (A) used when the set value is 1, which is a high setting, and The second acquisition number setting suggestion effect determination table (B) used when the setting value is 2, which is a high setting, is used when the setting value is 2, which is a low setting. The data is set so that the rendering of displaying the high setting suggesting image and the high setting confirmation suggesting image such as the fourth character image and the fifth character image is selected as the setting suggesting effect at a higher rate than the determination table. It is As a result, as the acquisition number increases, the reliability of the set value suggestion effect by the acquisition number setting suggestion effect increases.

Therefore, among the first to fourth character images, the setting-suggestion effect display for displaying specific character images such as the third character image and the fourth character image is set to high due to such a ratio relationship. , the selected ratio differs depending on the number of acquisitions. As a result, as the number of wins increases, the player's expectation for high setting according to the type of character image displayed in the win number setting suggesting effect can be heightened. For example, as the acquisition number increases, when the third character image or the fourth character image is displayed in the acquisition number setting suggesting effect, the player's expectation for the high setting is increased more than when the first character image is displayed. can be enhanced.

FIG. 9-12 is a flow chart showing acquisition number notification processing. Acquisition number notification processing is performed as a part of processing within the effect processing (S176) during the big hit in FIG. The calculation for adding and updating the winning number of game balls during the game state each time the big winning opening winning notification command is received is performed in a process different from the winning number notification process.

First, the effect control CPU 120, based on the confirmation of the above-described calculation result, whether the number of acquired game balls exceeds the specific number of 1000 × n (n = 1 to 3) shots It is determined whether or not (232FS001). Specifically, the 232FS001 first checks whether or not the number of shots exceeded 1,000, then checks whether or not the number of shots has exceeded 2,000, and then checks when the number of shots exceeds 3,000. Check whether or not In this way, it is checked whether the number of acquired shots exceeds a specific number for every 1000 shots acquired from 1000 to 3000 shots.

When the number of acquired game balls exceeds any of 1000×n (n=1 to 3) (Y in 232FS001), the effect control CPU 120 selects the character image for the effect indicating the number of acquired game balls. A random number is extracted, and 1000 to 3000 shots are made by any of the 1st to 3rd winning number setting suggestion effect determination tables in FIGS. The kind of effect including the character image to be displayed when the corresponding acquisition number is exceeded is determined (232FS002), and the process proceeds to 232FS009. On the other hand, when the acquired number of game balls does not exceed any of 1000×n (n=1 to 3) shots (N in 232FS001), the effect control CPU 120 shifts the process to 232FS003.

In 232FS003, the effect control CPU 120, based on the confirmation of the above-mentioned calculation result, the number of acquired game balls exceeds the specific number of 1000 × m (m = 4 to 9). Determine whether or not Specifically, the 232FS003 first confirms whether or not it has exceeded 4,000 shots, then confirms whether it has exceeded 5,000 shots, and then checks when it has exceeded 6,000 shots. Next, confirm whether or not the number of shots exceeded 7,000, then confirm whether or not the number of shots exceeded 8,000, and then confirm whether or not the number of shots exceeded 9,000. Check whether or not the time has passed. In this way, it is checked whether the number of acquired shots exceeds a specific number for every 1000 shots acquired from 4000 to 9000 shots.

Effect control CPU 120, when the number of acquired game balls exceeds any of 1000×m (m=4 to 9) (Y in 232FS003), a random number for effect selection of the acquisition number setting suggestion effect 9-11 (A) to (C) according to the set values (set values 1 to 3), according to any of the first to third acquisition number setting suggestion effect determination tables, when 4000 to 9000 shots are exceeded Among them, the type of effect including the character image to be displayed when the corresponding acquisition number is exceeded is determined (232FS004), and the process proceeds to 232FS009. On the other hand, when the number of acquired game balls does not exceed 1000×m (m=4 to 9) (N in 232FS003), the effect control CPU 120 shifts the acquired number of game balls to 232FS005. do.

At 232FS005, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of acquired game balls exceeds a specific number (every 1000 shots) of 1000×p (≧10) shots or more. Specifically, the 232FS005 first checks whether or not the number of shots exceeds 10,000, then checks whether or not the number of shots exceeds 11,000. Check whether or not it is time to exceed the number of acquisitions.

Effect control CPU 120, when the number of acquired game balls exceeds a specific number of 1000 x p (≥ 10) or more (Y in 232FS005), the CPU 120 for selection of effect of acquisition number setting suggestion effect A random number is extracted, and 10,000 shots or more are determined by any of the first to third winning number setting suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. The type of effect including the character image to be displayed when the corresponding number of acquisitions exceeds the specified number is determined (232FS006), and the process proceeds to 232FS009. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to 232FS007 when the number of acquired game balls does not exceed a specific number of 1000×p (≧10) or more (N in 232FS005).

In 232FS007, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether any of the specific numbers (timings 11111, 2222, . . Specifically, in 232FS007, first, it is confirmed whether or not 1111 shots have been exceeded, and then it is confirmed whether or not 22222 shots have been exceeded. Check whether it is time to exceed one of the numbers.

The effect control CPU 120 sets the high setting (setting value 1, setting value In the case of 2), a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to display special character images other than the first to fifth character images shown in FIGS. 9-11, and the lottery is won. If so, it is decided to display the special acquisition number image (232FS008), and the process proceeds to 232FS009. If the lottery is not won, the special acquisition number image is not displayed. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 ends the process when the number of acquisitions is not 1111×r (≧1) or more (N in 232FS007). Thus, there is a special win count image that can only be displayed when the setting is at the high setting. As a result, when the special acquisition number image is displayed, it is determined that the setting value is high.

At 232FS009, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character image determined at 232FS002, 232FS004, 232FS006, or 232FS008 and the winning number image corresponding to the winning number, and ends the process.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 executes the acquisition number setting suggesting effect as shown in FIG. 9-10 by executing the acquisition number notification process of FIG. 9-12.

[Example of production when execution period overlaps with acquisition number setting suggestion production and other production]
Since the acquisition number setting suggestion effect described above is executed when the number of acquired game balls reaches a specific number during the jackpot game state, it is executed during a predetermined period after the start of the game state, such as an interval between rounds. During the period, the fanfare production period at the start of the jackpot gaming state, and the ending production period at the end of the jackpot gaming state, setting suggestion production (for example, setting suggestion production in the interval period between rounds), and other Some or all of the production and execution periods may overlap. In such a case, the acquisition number setting suggestion effect may be preferentially executed.

In addition, when the execution period of the acquisition number setting suggestion effect and other effects partially or wholly overlap, both the acquisition number setting suggestion effect and the other effects may be executed in parallel. . Alternatively, the execution timing of one of the overlapping effects may be shifted by a predetermined period so as not to be duplicated. Alternatively, only one of the effects may be preferentially executed, or both effects may be executed, but one of the effects may be limited (for example, one of the effects may be displayed in a reduced size, or the other may be output as audio). , stop the execution of a part of the effect such as the light emission effect, etc.).

[Example of effect when the execution period overlaps between the acquisition number setting suggestion effect and the over winning setting suggestion effect]
Since the winning number setting suggestion effect described above is executed when the number of winning game balls reaches a specific number during the jackpot game state, for example, the over winning setting of the characteristic part 231F is executed during the interval period between rounds. The suggestive effect and the execution period may partially or completely overlap. In such a case, both the acquisition number setting suggestion effect and the acquisition number setting suggestion effect may be executed in parallel.

Incidentally, when the execution periods of the number-of-wins setting suggesting effect and the over winning setting suggesting effect overlap, one of the effects may be preferentially executed. Alternatively, the execution timing of one of the effects may be shifted by a predetermined period so as not to be duplicated. Alternatively, only one of the effects may be preferentially executed, or both effects may be executed, but one of the effects may be limited (for example, one of the effects may be displayed in a reduced size, or the other may be output as audio). , stop the execution of a part of the effect such as the light emission effect, etc.).

Next, main effects obtained by the characteristic portion 232F will be described.
[1] As shown in Fig. 9-11, every time the number of acquired game balls in the jackpot game state reaches a specific number, it is suggested which of the set values 1 to 3 is set. As an effect, the winning number setting suggesting effect can be executed, so that the attraction of the winning number setting suggesting effect of the pachinko game machine 1 provided with the set value can be improved.

[2] As shown in Fig. 9-10, by displaying the acquisition number image 232F001 and the character images such as the first character image to the fifth character image 232F002 to 232F005, etc., the acquisition number setting suggestion effect is executed, and as shown in FIGS. 9-11 (A) to (C), the selection ratio of the character image display of multiple types of setting suggestion effects differs depending on the setting value 1 to setting value 3, so the number of acquisitions It is possible to draw attention to the type of specific image displayed in the setting suggesting effect.

[3] As shown in 232FS007 and 232FS008 in Figs. 9-12, the images displayed in the setting suggestion effect include an image of the number of winning double eyes and a special character image. It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the number image and the special character image are displayed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[4] As shown in Figures 9-11 (A) to (C), when the number of acquired game balls is larger than when the number is smaller, the reliability indicating which set value is suggested by the character image Since the degree is high, not only the joy of winning the game ball but also the setting suggestion reliability of the image displayed in the setting suggestion effect is improved, thereby improving the interest of the game.

As shown in [5] [Example of effect when execution period overlaps with acquisition number setting suggestion effect and other effect], both acquisition number setting suggestion effect and interval period setting suggestion effect between rounds can be executed. In such a case, when the execution timings of these effects overlap, the acquisition number setting suggesting effect is executed, so it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in acquiring game balls.

[6] As shown in [Example of effect when the execution period of the winning number setting suggesting effect and the over winning setting suggesting effect overlap], when both the winning number setting suggesting effect and the over winning setting suggesting effect can be executed When the execution timings of these effects overlap, both effects are executed, and both effects are surely executed, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The control in FIG. 8 and the control in FIGS. 9-10 to 9-12 may be applied in combination with each other. In other words, the control related to the setting of the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK and the control related to the rendering of the characteristic portion 232F may be combined.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 232F)
Regarding the characteristic portion 232F described above, there is a game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 as a conventional game machine in which setting values can be changed. In addition, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-075436 describes a game machine capable of executing a notification effect when the number of acquired game balls, which are game media, reaches a specific number during a jackpot game as an advantageous state. there is something However, in the techniques described in JP-A-2010-200902 and JP-A-2010-075436, there is room for improvement in the notification effects of gaming machines provided with set values. Therefore, as a game machine of means 1 related to the characteristic part 232F for providing a game machine that can improve the interest of the notification effect in the game machine provided with the set value,
A game machine (pachinko game machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player,
Setting means (game control microcomputer 100, etc.) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 3, etc.),
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100, etc.) capable of progressing the game so that the degree of advantage (jackpot probability, etc.) for the player differs based on the set set values (set value 1 to set value 3, etc.) and
When the number of acquisitions (number of payouts) of game media (game balls) in the advantageous state reaches a specific number (exceeding number per 1000 shots), a notification effect (a performance suggesting setting of the number of acquisitions) can be executed,
The execution ratio of the plurality of types of notification effects provided according to the set value differs (in FIG. 9-11, the selection ratio of the plurality of types of setting suggestion effects differs depending on the set values 1 to 3, etc.),
It may be a game machine characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the notification effect in the game machine provided with the set value.

As a game machine of means 2 related to the characteristic part 232F,
The notification effect is composed of an acquisition number image (acquisition number image 232F001, etc.) indicating the acquisition number of game media, and a specific image (first character image to fifth character image, etc. in FIGS. 9-10),
The selection ratio of the specific images provided in a plurality of types is varied according to the setting values (setting values 1 to 3) (in FIGS. 9-11 (A) to (C), the setting values The selection ratio of the character image display of multiple types of setting suggestion effects is different, etc.),
The game machine of the means 1 related to the characterizing part 232F characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the type of the specific image.

As a game machine of means 3 related to the characteristic part 232F,
The notification effect includes a special winning number image (double eyes winning number image and special character image) that is executed only when the set value is high, which is highly advantageous for the player (232FS007 in FIGS. 9-12, 232FS008),
It may be a game machine of means 1 or means 2 relating to the characteristic part 232F characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the special acquisition number image is displayed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

As a game machine of means 4 related to the characteristic part 232F,
When the number of acquired game media is large, the setting suggestion reliability indicating which set value is suggested by the specific image is higher than when the number of acquired game media is small (FIGS. 9-11 (A) to (C)),
It may be a game machine of means 2 or 3 relating to the characteristic part 232F characterized by:
According to such a configuration, not only is the player happy to have acquired the game medium, but also the setting suggestion reliability of the specific image is improved, so that the interest in the game is improved.

As a game machine of means 5 related to the characteristic part 232F,
During a predetermined period in the advantageous state, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect (such as a setting suggestion effect for an interval period between rounds) for a setting suggestion different from the notification effect,
When the execution timing of the notification effect and the setting suggestion effect overlap, the notification effect is preferentially executed ([Example of effect when execution period overlaps with acquisition number setting suggestion effect and other effect] etc. ),
It may be a game machine of the means 1 to 4 relating to the characteristic part 232F characterized by:
According to such a configuration, since the notification effect is given priority over the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in acquiring game media.

As a game machine of means 6 related to the characteristic part 232F,
variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7, etc.),
Variable winning control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the variable winning means from the first state to the second state when a predetermined number (the upper limit of the winning number) of game media is won in the variable winning means. and
A specific effect (over winning setting suggesting effect in FIG. 9-6) can be executed in relation to the fact that game media greater than the predetermined number have won the variable winning means (over winning),
The execution ratio of the specific effects provided in a plurality of types differs depending on the setting value (in FIG. 9-11, the selection ratio of the setting suggestive effects of a plurality of types differs depending on the setting values 1 to 3, etc.),
When the execution timing of the notification effect and the specific effect overlap, both effects are executed ([example of effect when execution period overlaps between acquisition number setting suggestion effect and over winning setting suggestion effect] etc.),
It may be a game machine of the means 1 to 4 relating to the characteristic part 232F characterized by:
According to such a configuration, even when the execution timings of the notification effect and the specific effect overlap, both effects are reliably executed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Description of Characteristic Portion 233F]
Next, the characteristic portion 232F of this embodiment will be described. In the pachinko game machine, a V winning occurs when a V winning occurs due to detection by the detection means that a game ball has passed through a specific area (V area) provided in the variable winning ball device. In some cases, the effect control CPU 120 executes a V winning notification effect, which is an effect for notifying that a winning prize has been awarded.

As an example of a pachinko gaming machine in which various game controls are executed when a V prize is generated, there are the following one-and-two mixing machines and V variable machines.

[Type 1 and Type 2 mixers]
First, an overview of the configuration of the one- and two-kind mixer will be described. A first-class game machine that can be controlled to a big hit game state based on the judgment result of lottery judgment using random numbers for big hit judgment (hereinafter referred to as big hit judgment), and a lottery judgment using random numbers for small hit judgment ( A pachinko game machine combined with a second-type gaming machine that is controlled to a small-hit game state based on the judgment result of (hereinafter referred to as a small-hit judgment) and can be controlled to a big-hit game state when a V winning occurs, It is called a so-called one-and-two type mixer.

Specifically, in addition to a variable winning ball device for big wins, such as the special variable winning ball device 7, which is provided with a big winning opening that is opened in a big winning advantageous state, the one-and-two mixing machine has a small winning game state. There is provided a variable winning ball device that is opened at. A variable winning ball device for a small hit is provided in the game area. A variable winning ball device for a small hit is provided with a V region into which game balls can enter.

When the start winning to the first start winning opening is detected, the big hit determination is executed, and when the judgment result is a big hit, the variable display of the first special figure is executed and the big hit display result (specific display result ), and the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes the first-class jackpot game control in which the jackpot variable winning ball device is opened for a predetermined number of rounds.

When the start winning to the second start winning opening is detected, the big hit determination is executed, and when the judgment result (specific display result) of the big hit is obtained, the variable display of the second special figure is executed and the big hit display result. The game control similar to the big hit based on the starting winning to the first starting winning opening is executed, such as being controlled to the big winning game state. On the other hand, when the small hit determination results in a judgment result not to be a big hit, the small hit judgment is executed, and if the judgment result is a small hit, the variation display of the second special figure is executed and the small hit display result is obtained. is controlled to a small winning game state, and the variable winning ball device for small winning is controlled to be open for a predetermined time. When a game ball is received by the variable winning ball device for small winning in a small winning game state and the game ball is detected by entering the V area, the variable winning ball device for big winning is operated over a predetermined number of rounds. The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes the second type jackpot game control to open the jackpot game state.

[V Transformer]
Next, the outline of the configuration of the V probability changer will be described. In the V probability variable machine, a V area into which a game ball can enter is provided in the variable winning ball device that is opened in the big hit game state like the special variable winning ball device 7 . The probability variable winning device provided with the V area may be composed of the special variable winning ball device 7 itself, or may be composed of a variable winning ball device for big win provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 7.例文帳に追加

In the V probability variable machine, it is determined to be a big hit based on the judgment result for judging the big hit, and when it is decided to make the type of the probability variable big hit based on the judgment result of the big hit type judgment, the big hit game state is entered. In a predetermined round, the variable winning ball device for big hits is controlled to be in an open state in such a manner that game balls can enter the V area. When it is decided not to use the variable probability big win type based on the determination result of the big win type determination, the variable winning ball device for the big win is controlled to be in an open state in such a manner that the game balls cannot enter the V area.

In the V probability variable machine, in a predetermined round, when a game ball enters the V area and is detected, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 controls the probability variable state after the jackpot game state ends.
[Example of V prize setting suggestion effect]
In the characteristic part 233F, when a V winning occurs in a pachinko game machine capable of generating a V winning, such as the one-two-kind mixing machine and the V definite variable machine described above, it is an effect to inform that a V winning has occurred. As a V prize notification effect, in addition to notifying that a V prize has occurred, a V that can suggest which set value of set values 1 to 3 is set for the set value such as the winning probability of the aforementioned big win. A winning setting suggesting effect is executed, and for the V winning setting suggesting effect, the execution ratio (selection ratio) of the effect provided for the effect type is different according to the set values 1 to 3 of the probability of winning the jackpot, etc. will be explained. .

FIG. 9-13 is a display screen view of the image display device 5 showing an example of the effect of the V prize setting suggestion effect related to the characterizing portion 233F. In a pachinko game machine capable of generating a V prize, such as a one-and-a-half machine and a V variable machine, when a V prize occurs, a V prize occurrence designation command is issued as an effect control command that designates that a V prize has occurred. When the effect control board 12 receives a V winning generation designation command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the V winning setting suggesting effect.

9-13, (A) shows the effect mode of the V prize setting suggestion effect when the normal image is displayed on the image display device 5 when the setting value 3, which is the low setting, is set, (B) shows the effect mode of the V prize setting suggestion effect when the high setting suggestion image is displayed on the image display device 5 when the setting value 1, which is the high setting, is set, and (D) shows the effect mode of the high setting suggestion effect. The effect mode of the V prize setting suggestion effect when the high setting confirmation image is displayed on the image display device 5 when the setting value 1 is set is shown.

In the V winning setting suggesting effect, for example, the image display device 5 displays a V winning image 233F001 indicating "V winning" of "V" and surrounding it in a predetermined color, as shown in (A) to (C). In addition to basically displaying a V image consisting of an aura image (a jagged image), it is also possible to indicate which of the set values 1 to 3 the set value of the probability of winning the jackpot is set to. Character images selected from a plurality of types of character images such as a first character image 233F002, a second character image 233F003, and a third character image 233F004 are displayed.

The first character image 233F002 shown in (A) is a character image used when displaying a normal image that is selected and displayed at the highest rate regardless of whether the setting is low or high. be. A second character image 233F003 shown in (B) is a character image that is used when displaying a high setting suggestion image that is more likely to be selected when the setting is high than when the setting is low. A third character image 233F004 shown in (C) is a character image that is used when displaying a high setting confirmation image that is not selected for the low setting and is selected only for the high setting.

FIG. 9-14 is a diagram showing, in tabular form, a V winning setting suggesting effect determination table used for selecting the effect type (effect image including a character image) of the setting suggesting effect to be executed as the V winning setting suggesting effect. . The V prize setting suggestion effect determination table is stored in the ROM 121 .

FIG. 9-14 (A) shows the number of consecutive jackpots (the number of consecutive jackpots), for example, a jackpot during a special game state after the jackpot game state such as a variable probability state or a time-saving state. This is the 1st V prize setting suggestion effect determination table used when the number of consecutive occurrences of the event is 9 times or less. FIG. 9-11(B) is a 2nd V prize setting suggesting effect determination table used when the number of consecutive big hits is 10 or more. The first and second V prize setting suggestion effect determination tables are stored in the ROM 121 .

In the first and second V winning setting suggestion effect determination tables of FIGS. 9-14 (A) and (B), character images such as the first to third character images displayed in the V winning setting suggestion effect determination table When the correspondence relationship between the type of effect image including the type of V winning setting suggestion and random number allocation (displayed in %) for selection of effect selection is set to set value 1, when set to set value 2 , and when set to the set value 3, respectively. The random number for selection of the V prize setting suggestion effect is a random number for selection of effect updated by the effect control CPU 120 .

As shown in the tables of FIGS. 9-14 (A) and (B), the type of effect image including the type of character image displayed in the V prize setting suggestion effect is "normal image including display of first character image". setting suggestion effect to display ", setting suggestion effect to "display high setting suggestion image including display of second character image", and "display of high setting confirmed image including display of third character image" Includes a setting suggestion rendering.

As shown in FIGS. 9-14 (A) and (B), the ratio of selecting the setting suggestion effect of "displaying a normal image including the display of the first character image" in the V winning setting suggestion effect is the set value 1, setting value 2, and setting value 3 are each 88% or more, and the setting suggesting effect of basically “displaying a normal image including the display of the first character image” is selected at an extremely high rate. . Then, the ratio of selecting the setting suggesting effect of "displaying the normal image including the display of the first character image" has a relationship of "setting value 1<setting value 2<setting value 3". As a result, when the setting suggestion effect of "displaying the normal image including the display of the first character image" is executed, the set value 3 is the highest percentage.

As shown in FIGS. 9-14 (A) and (B), the selection ratio of the setting suggestive effect that "displays a high setting suggestive image including the display of the second character image" is "set value 3 < set value 2 <setting value 1”. As a result, when the setting suggestion effect of "displaying the high setting suggestion image including the display of the second character image" is performed, the ratio of the setting value 1 is the highest.

As shown in FIGS. 9-14 (A) and (B), the selection ratio of the setting suggestion effect for "displaying a high setting confirmed image including the display of the third character image" is "setting value 2, 3 < setting value 1”, and set values 2 and 3 are 0%. As a result, when the setting suggestion effect of "displaying the high setting confirmed image including the display of the third character image" is performed, the setting value 1 is confirmed.

Then, according to FIGS. 9-14 (A) and (B), the setting suggesting effect of "displaying a high setting suggesting image including the display of the second character image" and the "high setting including the display of the third character image" are shown. With respect to the setting suggestive effect of "display of suggestive image", the ratio of setting value 1 or setting value 2, which is high setting, is higher than setting value 3, which is low setting. As a result, when the setting suggestion effect of "displaying a high setting suggesting image including the display of the second character image" and the setting suggestion effect of "displaying the high setting suggesting image including the display of the third character image" are performed. have higher expectations at the high setting than at the low setting.

In addition, (B) the 2nd V prize setting suggestion effect determination table used when the number of consecutive games is 10 or more is used when the number of consecutive games is 9 times or less (A) 1st V prize setting suggestion effect. Compared with the determination table, when the setting value is high such as setting value 1 and setting value 2, setting suggestion effect of "displaying high setting suggestion image including display of second character image" and "display of third character image" "Display of high setting suggestive image including display" is high, and when the setting suggestive effect is selected at a low setting such as setting value 3, "display of normal image including display of the first character image" is selected. The ratio of setting suggestive effects to be selected is low. As a result, as the number of consecutive games increases, the reliability of the setting value suggesting effect by the V prize setting suggesting effect increases.

When an image to be displayed in the V winning setting suggestion effect is selected using the first and second V winning setting suggestion effect determination tables of FIGS. The setting suggestion effect of "displaying a normal image including display" is executed at a high frequency, and the setting suggestion effect of "displaying a normal image including display of the first character image" is performed at a lower frequency than the setting suggestion effect of "displaying a second character image". Either a setting suggesting effect of "displaying a high setting suggesting image including display" or a setting suggesting effect of "displaying a high setting suggesting image including display of a third character image" is executed. Depending on the type of character image displayed in the V prize setting suggesting effect, the degree of expectation as to whether the setting is high or not differs, and the degree of expectation as to which of the setting values 1 to 3 corresponds differs. With such a V prize setting suggestion effect determination table setting suggestion effect, the degree of expectation of the player for the set value of the big win or the like can be improved. Furthermore, depending on the type of character image, it may be determined that the set value 1 is the most advantageous for the player. It is possible to further improve the degree of expectation for

FIG. 9-15 is a flow chart showing the V winning notification process. The V winning notification process is a process performed as a part of the process during the big hit (S176) in FIG.

First, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is time to receive the V winning generation designation command, which is the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the V winning occurs. It is determined whether or not it is time for V winning (233FS001). The effect control CPU 120 shifts to 233FS002 when it is time to receive the V winning generation designation command (Y in 233FS001). On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the process when the V winning generation designation command is not received (N in 233FS001).

At 233FS002, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the count value of the number of consecutive residences counter, which is a counter for counting the number of consecutive residences, is 10 times or more. The number of consecutive games counter is counting means for counting the number of consecutive games by adding and updating the count value each time a big win satisfying the condition of consecutive games occurs in a process different from the V winning notification process. be.

When the count value of the number-of-plays counter is not equal to or greater than 10 (N in 233FS002), the effect control CPU 120 extracts a random number for selecting a effect image of the effect suggesting V prize setting, and extracts the effect image selection random number shown in FIG. 9-14(A). Based on the 1st V prize setting suggestion effect determination table, the effect image including the display of the character image at the time of the V prize corresponding to the current set values (set values 1 to 3) is determined (233FS003), and the process proceeds to 233FS004. On the other hand, when the number of consecutive mansions counter is 10 or more (Y in 233FS002), the effect control CPU 120 extracts the effect image selection random number for the effect suggesting the setting of the V prize, and Based on the second V winning setting suggestion effect determination table, the effect image including the display of the character image at the time of the V winning according to the setting is determined (233FS005), and the process proceeds to 233FS004.

At 233FS004, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character image and the V winning image corresponding to the effect image determined at 233FS003 or 233FS004, and ends the process.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 executes the V winning setting suggesting effect as shown in FIG. 9-13 by executing the V winning notification process shown in FIG. 9-15.

[Example of effect when the execution period overlaps between the V prize setting suggestion effect and the acquisition number setting suggestion effect]
When the execution periods of the V prize setting suggesting effect and the acquisition number setting suggesting effect of the characteristic part 233F partially or wholly overlap, the V prize setting suggesting effect may be preferentially executed.

Incidentally, when the execution periods of the V prize setting suggesting effect and the acquisition number setting suggesting effect overlap, both effects may be executed in parallel. Alternatively, one of the effects may be preferentially executed. Alternatively, the execution timing of one of the effects may be shifted by a predetermined period so as not to be duplicated. Alternatively, only one of the effects may be preferentially executed, or both effects may be executed, but one of the effects may be limited (for example, one of the effects may be displayed in a reduced size, or the other may be output as audio). , stop the execution of a part of the effect such as the light emission effect, etc.).

As an example of executing the V prize setting suggesting effect using a character image, the effect using a plurality of different character images has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. An effect suggesting the set value may be produced by making the character operate in different types of motion modes and varying the selection ratio of a plurality of types of motion modes according to the set value for one character image.

In addition, as an example of executing the V winning setting suggesting effect, the V winning image 33F001 is displayed in a plurality of motion patterns (multiple rotation directions (up, down, left, right), multiple swing motions (up, down, left, right), etc.). Alternatively, an effect may be provided in which the V winning image 33F001 is moved according to an operation pattern selected from a plurality of types. In that case, the set value may be suggested by changing the selection ratio of the plurality of types of V winning images according to the set value.

In addition, as an example of executing the V winning setting suggesting effect, the effect using one type of V winning image 33F001 is shown, but this is not the only option. , multiple sizes, etc.) may be used. In that case, the setting value may be suggested by changing the selection ratio of the V winning images in a plurality of types of display modes according to the setting value. By changing the selection ratio of the V winning images in a plurality of types of display modes according to such setting values, the setting value is suggested, and the selection of multiple types of V winning images according to the setting values as described above. The V prize setting suggesting effect may be executed in combination with the effect of varying the ratio.

Also, as an example of executing the V winning setting suggesting effect, the V winning setting suggesting effect using the V winning image 33F001 as described above is executed without executing the V winning setting suggesting effect using the character image. good too.

Next, main effects obtained by the characteristic portion 233F will be described.
[1] As shown in FIG. 9-13, for a pachinko game machine of one type and two type mixture machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the detection of V winning, according to the setting value 1 to setting value 3 Since the selection ratios of a plurality of types of V winning setting suggesting performances using character images etc. are different, the interest of the V winning setting suggesting performance of the pachinko game machine 1 provided with the set values can be improved.

[2] As shown in FIG. 9-13, for the pachinko game machine of the V probability variable machine that can be controlled to the probability variable state based on the detection of the V winning prize, the character image according to the setting value 1 to setting value 3 Since the selection ratios of a plurality of types of V winning setting suggesting performances using .

[3] As shown in Fig. 9-14, since the selection ratio of the character images for the multiple types of V winning setting suggestion effects differs depending on the setting value 1 to setting value 3, the player should pay attention to the type of the character image. The interest in the game can be improved.

[4] As shown in FIGS. 9-14 (A) and (B), the selection ratio of a plurality of types of V prize setting suggestive effects differs according to the number of consecutive games, so that the jackpot game state is continuously controlled. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the pattern of the V prize setting suggestive effect when the player is present, and the interest in the game is improved.

[5] As shown in FIGS. 9-14 (A) and (B), the greater the number of consecutive games, the higher the setting suggestion reliability indicating which set value is suggested by the character image of the winning setting suggestion effect. high. As a result, the number of consecutive games of big hits is associated with the character image of the prize setting suggesting performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[6] As shown in [Example of effect when the execution periods of the V prize setting suggesting effect and the winning number setting suggesting effect overlap], the execution period of the V winning setting suggesting effect and the winning number setting suggesting effect of the characteristic part 233F is In the case of partial or complete overlap, the player can be given a sense of security when passing through the V area by preferentially executing the V prize setting suggesting effect.

The control in FIG. 8 and the control in FIGS. 9-13 to 9-15 may be applied in combination with each other. That is, the control related to the setting of the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK and the control related to the presentation of the characteristic portion 233F may be combined.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 233F)
Regarding the characteristic portion 232F described above, there is a game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 as a conventional game machine in which setting values can be changed. Further, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-202605 discloses a game machine capable of executing a passage notification effect when a game ball, which is a game medium, passes through a specific area. However, in the techniques described in JP-A-2010-200902 and JP-A-2016-202605, there is room for improvement with respect to the passage notification effects of gaming machines provided with set values. Therefore, as a game machine of means 1 related to the characteristic part 233F for providing a game machine that can improve the interest of the passage notification effect in the game machine provided with the set value,
A game machine (pachinko game machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player,
Setting means (game control microcomputer 100, etc.) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 3, etc.),
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100, etc.) capable of progressing the game so that the degree of advantage (jackpot probability, etc.) for the player differs based on the set set values (set value 1 to set value 3, etc.) and
The advantageous state (jackpot game state, etc.) can be controlled based on the game medium passing through the specific region (V region),
When the game medium passes through the specific area, a passage notification effect (V prize setting suggestive effect) is executed, and the execution ratio of the passage notification effect provided in a plurality of types differs according to the set value (see FIGS. 9-14). The selection ratio of multiple types of setting suggestion effects differs depending on the setting value 1 to setting value 3, etc.),
It may be a game machine characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the passing notification effect in a gaming machine provided with a set value.

As a game machine of means 2 related to the characteristic part 233F,
A game machine (pachinko game machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player,
Setting means (game control microcomputer 100, etc.) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 3, etc.),
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100, etc.) capable of progressing the game so that the degree of advantage (jackpot probability, etc.) for the player differs based on the set set values (set value 1 to set value 3, etc.) and
Based on the game medium passing through the specific area (V area), it is possible to control to a special state (probability variable state etc.) different from the advantageous state,
When the game medium passes through the specific area, a passage notification effect (V prize setting suggestive effect) is executed, and the execution ratio of the passage notification effect provided in a plurality of types differs according to the set value (see FIGS. 9-14). The selection ratio of multiple types of setting suggestion effects differs depending on the setting value 1 to setting value 3, etc.),
It may be a game machine characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the passing notification effect in a gaming machine provided with a set value.

As a game machine of means 3 related to the characteristic part 233F,
In the passing notification effect, predetermined images (V winning image 33F001 and first character image 233F002 to third character image 233F003) are displayed, and the selection ratio of the plurality of predetermined images provided in accordance with the set value differs (Fig. In 9-14, the selection ratio of multiple types of setting suggestion effects differs depending on the setting value 1 to setting value 3, etc.),
It may be a game machine of means 1 or means 2 relating to the characteristic part 233F characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of the predetermined image, thereby improving the interest of the game.

As a game machine of means 4 related to the characteristic part 233F,
Depending on the number of times the advantageous state is continuously controlled (the number of times of consecutive residences), the execution ratio of the passage notification effect differs (in FIGS. 9-14 (A) and (B), there are multiple types The selection ratio of the setting suggestion production is different, etc.),
It may be a game machine of means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic part 233F characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of passage notification effect when the control is continuously performed in an advantageous state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

As a game machine of means 5 related to the characteristic part 233F,
The higher the number of times of continuous control to the advantageous state (the number of times of continuous operation), the higher the setting suggestion reliability indicating which set value is suggested by the predetermined image (FIGS. 9-14 (A), (B)),
The game machine of the means 3 related to the characterizing part 233F characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the interest in the game is improved by associating the number of consecutive advantageous states with the predetermined image.

As a game machine of means 6 related to the characteristic part 233F,
When the number of acquisitions (number of payouts) of game media (game balls) in the advantageous state reaches a specific number (exceeding number per 1000 shots), a notification effect (a performance suggesting setting of the number of acquisitions) can be executed,
When the passing notification effect and the notification effect are executed at the same timing, the passing notification effect is preferentially executed. example]),
It may be a game machine of the means 1 to 5 related to the characteristic part 233F characterized by:
According to such a configuration, since the passing notification effect is given priority over the notification effect, it is possible to give a sense of security when passing through the specific area.

[Example of setting suggestion production according to the timing of the jackpot occurrence during the variable state period]

After the end of the jackpot game state, in a pachinko game machine in which game control is executed to control the probability variable state over a predetermined period (a period in which the variable display is performed for a predetermined number of times), during the probability variable state period, which period ( For example, whether a big hit occurred at the timing of the first half period and the second half period, the period up to a specific number of fluctuations (for example, 20 times, etc.), the period up to a specific period among the periods divided into multiple periods of 3 or more periods, etc.) Accordingly, the execution ratio of the setting-suggestion effect as described above may be varied, and the reliability (expectation level), which is set to be high when the setting-suggestion effect is executed, may be varied.

For example, when a big win occurs in a relatively early period during the variable probability state period, the player feels as though he or she has lost a loss due to the big win despite the fact that the variable probability state period still remains for a long period of time. , as a privilege for the occurrence of a big win in a relatively early period, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion performance as described above may be made higher than when the big win occurs in a relatively late period, and the setting suggestion performance is executed. You may raise the reliability (expectation) which is a high setting when By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that he or she has lost.

Conversely, for example, when a big win occurs in a relatively late period during the variable probability state period, the player feels relieved because the big win is made in a state in which the variable probability state period is not so long. As a benefit for the occurrence of a big win in a late period, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion performance as described above may be made higher than when the big win occurs in a relatively early period, and when the setting suggestion performance is executed. The reliability (expectation level), which is a high setting, may be increased. In this way, the player can feel a sense of security and an additional sense of profit, thereby further enhancing the amusement of the game.

[Example of light emission pattern of setting change notification and setting confirmation notification lamp]

In the setting change notification to notify that the setting value has been changed, in addition to the display of the setting change notification screen and the output of the setting change notification sound, or in place of part or all, light emission is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 Control may be performed to cause some or all of the light emitters, such as lamps (LEDs), to emit light in a specific light emission pattern. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of light emitters whose light emission is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100. FIG. Therefore, as a setting change notification, for example, the light emitters provided in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are changed during the normal game (during fluctuation, waiting (when not fluctuating), during a big hit, etc. ) (for example, a blinking display or a combination pattern that does not usually light up).

Also, in the setting confirmation notification to notify that the setting value can be confirmed, in addition to the display of the setting confirmation notification screen and the output of the setting confirmation notification sound, or instead of part or all, by the game control microcomputer 100 Control may be performed such that a part or all of light emitters such as lamps (LEDs) whose light emission is controlled emit light in a specific light emission pattern. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of light emitters whose light emission is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100. FIG. Therefore, as a setting confirmation notification, for example, the light emitters provided in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are displayed during the normal game (while fluctuating, waiting (not fluctuating), during the jackpot, etc.). ) (for example, a blinking display or a combination pattern that does not usually light up).

As described above, the luminous body controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 controls the execution of setting change notification and setting confirmation notification, so that the luminous body controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 It becomes possible to specify that the setting is being changed or confirmed.

It should be noted that the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B may be provided with a lamp that emits light only when the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked. Even with such a configuration, even if the pachinko game machine does not have an image display device, the special lamps provided in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B indicate that the settings are being changed. Or it becomes easy to specify that it is under confirmation. In addition, the luminous bodies whose light emission is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 are not limited to the luminous bodies provided in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and other luminous bodies such as lamps. may be used. When performing control to execute setting change notification or setting confirmation notification using the light emitter provided in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, during variable display of special symbols, special A setting change notification or a setting confirmation notification may be executed using different light emitters while the symbols are stopped.

In addition, the luminous body controlled by the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute setting change notification and setting confirmation notification, so that the luminous body controlled by the effect control CPU 120 is changing settings or confirming. You may make it possible to specify a certain thing.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 271F)
[Prerequisite Configuration Example of Characteristic Portion 271F]
Next, the characterizing part 271F of this embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 271F of the present embodiment basically changes the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big win and the small win according to the setting value set on the game hall side when the power is turned on. It is configured. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the display result determination table (
Winning probability) is used to change the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big win and the small win. The set value has three levels of 1 to 3. Set value 1 has the highest ball payout rate, and set value 1, set value 2, and set value 3 increase the ball payout rate in order. That is, when set value 1 is set as the set value, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest, and as the value increases in the order of set value 2 and set value 3, the degree of advantage decreases stepwise. Note that the set values may be provided in three or more stages. Also, the higher the number, the higher the advantage may be.

For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 271F of the present embodiment, the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big win and the small win changes according to the setting value set on the game hall side when the power is turned on. As an example, the odds of winning a big hit are 1/99 for setting value 1, 1/150 for setting value 2, and 1/200 for setting value 3. The setting value 3 is a setting value for setting the lowest probability of winning a jackpot among a plurality of types of setting values, and is called a low setting. The setting value 1 and the setting value 2 are setting values in which the probability of winning a jackpot or the like is set higher than the setting value 3 of the low setting, and are called high setting (change setting). It should be noted that setting value 3 may be used as a normal setting that is basically used, and setting values 1 and 2 may be used as changed settings (high settings) that are changed from the normal settings.

Regarding the characteristic portion 271F, the number of rounds is 15 as the type of jackpot game state executed when the display result of the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure becomes the specific display result (jackpot display result). 15-round jackpot (hereinafter referred to as 15R jackpot) and a 5-round jackpot with five rounds (hereinafter referred to as 5R jackpot). The 15R big win has a larger number of rounds than the 5R big win, and a larger number of prize balls (balls thrown out) can be expected than the 5R big win. In the following description, "round" may be indicated using the word "R".

The jackpot game state is a specific game state that is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 and is advantageous to the player. Specifically, the jackpot game state is a game state controlled when the display result of the variable display of the special symbols (first special pattern, second special pattern) becomes the jackpot display result (jackpot pattern), An open state (a first state advantageous to the player) as a first state in which a game ball can enter (win a prize) and a closed state as a second state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to win a prize (the first By opening and closing the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 as a variable winning means that can be changed to a second state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the state, a predetermined number of times, such as 15 rounds and 5 rounds, for example. This is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, in which the big winning opening is kept open over a period of time.

In this way, in the jackpot game state, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the special variable winning ball device 7 from the closed state (second state) to the open state (first state) like a round game. A predetermined game can be executed a predetermined number of times (15 times or 5 times). In the jackpot game state, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-1 or 10-2, in each round game, a game in which a prize can be won from the opening state to the closing state of the special variable winning ball device 7. As a specific display capable of specifying a predetermined number (upper limit) of balls, a winning number specific display is executed in a predetermined presentation mode.

For each round of the jackpot game state, an upper limit is set for the number of winning prizes to the special variable winning ball device 7, and when it is determined that the number of winning prizes reaches the upper limit value, the big winning opening is closed. Winning exceeding the upper limit may occur in each round due to game balls that have won before it is determined that the number of winning prizes has reached the upper limit. Winning of game balls exceeding the upper limit of the winning number in each round is called over-winning. When it is determined that over-winning has occurred, it is possible to execute over-winning performance, which is a specific performance related to the occurrence of over-winning, such as notifying that over-winning has occurred.

[First production example of winning number specific display]
FIG. 10-1 is a display screen view of the image display device 5 showing a first effect example of the number-of-wins specific display in the jackpot game state relating to the characteristic portion 271F. The effect of the winning number specific display in the jackpot game state described below is set by the effect control CPU 120 during the big win (S176) of FIG. 7 and executed.

Although illustration is omitted, at the start of the jackpot game state, the number of wins, which is the total number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game state (all rounds), is displayed on the image display device 5 according to the type of jackpot to be started. , select from a plurality of types of obtainable numbers (500, 1500) and notify in advance the obtainable number notification effect (for example, the obtainable number based on the operation detection (action detection) of the push button 31B of the player) is selected and can be displayed, or an effect that is unrelated to the detection of the player's motion and selects and displays the number of obtainable specific character images) is executed. Thereby, the player can recognize the total number of obtainable balls in the big win game state at the start of the big win game state.

At the start of each round such as the start of the 1R round in the jackpot game state, a round number image 271F001 indicating the current round number is displayed as shown in (A). A pitch number image 271F is displayed in a relatively small size in the upper left corner of the display area of the image display device 5, and "TOTAL 0/1500" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5. be.

In the number-of-balls-out image 271F002, a character image of "TOTAL" is displayed to indicate that the total number of balls in all rounds in one big-hit game state is displayed. In this example, the upper limit of the winning number to the variable winning ball device 7 in each round is 10, and 10 winning balls for one game ball winning the special variable winning ball device 7. (Pitch out) is paid out. Winning more than 10 prizes in each round corresponds to over-winning.

In the number-of-balls-out image 271F002, next to the character image of "TOTAL", for example, "0/1500" in (A), a number-of-balls-out numerical image showing the number of balls in the jackpot game state in the form of a fraction. is displayed. In the put-out numerical image, the denominator shows the total number of put-out balls (expected number of wins) that the player can get in all rounds of the jackpot game state (hereafter referred to as "acquirable number"). number display), and the numerical value of the numerator indicates the actual winning number, which is the sum of the number of balls actually won by the player (the number of payouts) since the start of the jackpot game state up to the present (hereinafter referred to as actual acquisition number display).

The obtainable number in all rounds of the 15R jackpot is, for example, 1500 (100 can be obtained per 1R), and the obtainable number in all rounds of the 5R jackpot is, for example, 500 (100 can be obtained per 1R). (A) shows a display example of the number-of-balls-out image 271F002 in the jackpot game state of the 15R jackpot.

By displaying such a number-of-balls-out image 271F002 in numerical values in the form of fractions of display of the number of possible wins and display of the actual number of wins, it is possible to obtain how many balls can be won during the current jackpot, and how many are currently available. The player can easily recognize whether or not he has won the number of balls put out.

In the number-of-put-outs image 271F002, when an over-winning occurs, the actual number of possible wins increases from the predetermined number of possible wins, but the number of wins is increased in advance by the number of wins notification performance at the start of the jackpot game state. Since it is notified, if an over-winning has occurred, the numerical value of the display of the number of possible wins displayed in the denominator of the number-of-balls-out image 271F002 is changed by the number of winnings corresponding to the over-winning (for example, Considering the case where "1500" is changed to "1510", etc., there is a risk that the player may feel uncomfortable in relation to the obtainable number notification effect. Therefore, in the number-of-balls-out image 271F002, in order to prevent occurrence of such a sense of incompatibility, the number-of-balls-out image 271F002 is displayed as shown in FIG. 10-1(C) and FIG. The display of the number of items that can be acquired will be displayed fixedly without being changed.

In each round in the jackpot game state, a plurality of winning display box images 271F003 imitating a box with a lid are displayed side by side in the lower area of the image display device 5, for example, as shown in (A). The prize display box image 271F003 is an image that can indicate the number of possible prizes (the upper limit of the number of prizes) in each round by the number of displayed images.

At the start of each round in the jackpot game state, as shown in (A), the prize display box image 271F003 with the lid closed displays the upper limit of the number of prizes (the number of possible prizes) in each round, such as 10. ) minutes are displayed. Then, in each round, each time a winning game ball into the special variable winning ball device 7 is detected, the winning display box image 271F003 is displayed as shown in (B), and the lid of the box is opened to specify a star-shaped winning display. A winning notification effect is performed in which the display mode is changed to release the image 271F004. This allows the player to recognize how many game balls have won the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round.

In each round, when there is no over-winning, as in (C), at the end of the relevant round, the image of all the winning display box images 271F003 with their lids open and lined up side by side is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is executed, an effect of erasing all the winning display box images 271F003 and ending the winning display box images 271F003 is executed. After that, at the start of the next round, an effect of newly appearing the prize display box image 271F003 with the lid closed for the next round is executed as shown in (A).

On the other hand, when there is an over-winning in each round, as shown in (D), at the end of the relevant round, the entire winning display box image 271F003 is displayed along with the exploded image, and the dashed arrow in the figure is displayed. After executing the effect of scattering as described above, the effect of ending the display of the winning display box images 271F003 is executed by erasing all the scattered winning display box images 271F003. After that, at the start of the next round, an effect of newly appearing the prize display box image 271F003 with the lid closed for the next round is executed as shown in (A).

As described above, in the first effect example of the number-of-wins specific display, the win display box image 271F003 is displayed in a different display mode depending on whether an over-win has occurred or when over-wins have not occurred in each round. be terminated.

[Second production example of winning number specific display]
FIG. 10-2 is a display screen view of the image display device 5 showing a second effect example of the number-of-wins specific display in the jackpot game state relating to the characteristic portion 271F. The effect of the winning number specific display in the jackpot game state described below is set and executed by the effect control CPU 120 during the big win (S176) of FIG.

10-2 differs from the effect shown in FIG. 10-1 in that the character image 271F005 is not displayed when there is no over-win shown in FIG. 10-2(C). After different effects are executed, such as the effect at the end of the round and the effect at the end of the round in which the character image 271F005 is displayed when there is an over-winning shown in FIG. This is the end of the display of the winning display box image 271F003.

In each round, when there is no over-winning, as shown in (C), at the end of the relevant round, an image in which the lids of all the winning display box images 271F003 arranged side by side are opened is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is executed, an effect of erasing all the winning display box images 271F003 and ending the winning display box images 271F003 is executed. After that, at the start of the next round, an effect of newly appearing the prize display box image 271F003 with the lid closed for the next round is executed as shown in (A).

On the other hand, when there is an over-winning in each round, a predetermined character image 271F005 appears at the left end of the display area of the image display device 5 at the end of the round as shown in (D). The display area is displayed to move from left to right in the direction of the dashed arrow in the drawing, and during this movement, it collides with all of the winning display box images 271F003 one after another, and all of the winning display box images 271F003 are displayed. is released outside the display area as indicated by the dashed arrow in the figure, and then the display of the winning display box images 271F003 is terminated by erasing all the released winning display box images 271F003. be. After that, at the start of the next round, an effect of newly appearing the prize display box image 271F003 with the lid closed for the next round is executed as shown in (A).

As described above, in the second effect example of the number-of-wins specific display, the win display box image is displayed after different effects are executed depending on whether an over-win has occurred or when over-wins have not occurred in each round. The display of 271F003 is terminated.

[Effect obtained by the first example and the second example of the winning number specific display]
[1] In the first effect example of the number-of-wins specific display, the display of the prize display box image 271F003 ends in a different display mode depending on whether over-winning does not occur or when over-winning occurs in each round. Therefore, the variation of the performance related to the round game is increased, so that the fun of the performance related to the round game can be improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[2] In the second effect example of the number-of-wins specific display, a prize display box image 271F003 is displayed after different effects are executed depending on whether over-winning has occurred or not, in each round. Since the display of is terminated, the variations of the performances related to the round game are enriched, so that the fun of the performances related to the round game can be improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[3] In the first effect example and the second effect example of the winning number specific display, as shown in Figure 10-1 (C) and Figure 10-2 (C), the number of possible balls that can be obtained is determined by the type of jackpot. is displayed as the denominator of the number-of-balls image 271F002, the number-of-balls image 271F002 is obtained even if an over-win occurs, taking into consideration the relationship with the number-of-obtainable-number notification effect performed in advance. Possible number display is displayed fixedly. However, if the display of the number of possible wins does not change when an over-win occurs, it is conceivable that some players may have a sense of disbelief about the acquisition of game balls due to an over-win. On the other hand, when an over-win occurs, instead of the display of the number of wins that can be won is not changed, there is a difference between the case where the over-win has not occurred and the case where the over-win has occurred, as shown in FIGS. , or display the winning display box image 271F003 after executing different effects as shown in FIGS. By ending the game, if an over-win occurs, an effect using the display of the win-win display box image 271F003 is executed. It is possible to avoid causing mistrust about things.

[4] In the first effect example and the second effect example of the winning number specific display, as shown in Fig. 10-1 (B) and Fig. 10-2 (B), every time a game ball wins in the big winning hole, the winning display By performing a prize-winning notification effect in which the lid is opened and a star-shaped prize-winning specific image 271F004 is released from the box image 271F003, the variety of effects related to the round game is increased, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be made

[Example of display of winning display box images that differ depending on the type of jackpot]
Next, an example will be described in which the effect control CPU 120 executes effect control to change the type of the winning display box image 271F003 displayed in each round according to the type of the jackpot. The effects shown below are set and executed by the effect processing (S176) during the big hit of FIG. 7 in the effect control CPU 120. FIG.

The prize display box images 271F003 shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2 are displayed in one type of prize display box image 271F003 regardless of the type of jackpot. Effect control may be executed to change the image type of the prize display box image 271F003 displayed in each round depending on the type of jackpot.

FIG. 10-3 is a diagram showing a winning display box selection table classified by jackpot type in tabular form. The winning display box selection table classified by jackpot type is stored in the ROM 121 on the effect control side. The prize display box images 271F003 shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2 are provided so that a plurality of types of images, such as a treasure box-shaped image and a paper box-shaped image, can be selected according to the type of the jackpot. ing.

In FIG. 10-3, for the winning display box image 271F003, data is set so that a paper box-shaped image is selected when the jackpot type is 5R, and a treasure box-shaped image is selected when the jackpot type is 15R. . The winning display box image 271F003 that can be selected in this way confirms the type of the big win for which the current big win game state is to be executed in the effect processing during the big win (S176) in FIG. After selecting and determining the type of winning display box image corresponding to the type of jackpot using the display box selection table, the determined type of winning display box image is displayed in a display mode as shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2. is displayed. Then, according to the winning of the game ball to the special variable winning ball device 7, the same effects as those shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2 are executed.

In this way, for the prize display box images 271F003 displayed in each round of the jackpot game state, a treasure box-shaped image is selected in the case of a 15R big win, and a paper box-shaped image is selected in the case of a 5R big win. Execution of the effect control to change the display mode of the prize display box image 271F003 according to the type of the big win game state makes the variation of the effect related to the round game abundant, thereby improving the interest of the game. can.

[Example of effect in which the winning display box image display ends differently depending on the number of over winnings]
Next, a description will be given of an effect example in which the display of the winning display box image differs depending on the number of over winnings. The effects shown below are set and executed by the effect processing (S176) during the big hit of FIG. 7 in the effect control CPU 120. FIG.

10-1 to 10-3, an effect may be executed in which the display of the winning display box image ends in the same manner regardless of the number of over winnings. 3, an effect may be executed in which the display of the winning display box image is changed in accordance with the number of over winnings. Such an effect is executed based on determining whether or not an over-win has occurred in the big-hit effect process (S176) in FIG. 7 and counting the number of occurrences of the over-win.

As an effect in which the end state of the winning display box image display differs according to the number of over-wins, the number of over-wins in each round (the number of over-wins) is counted, and when there is one over-win, the first color is displayed. (for example, brown) is scattered (example in FIG. 10-1) or released (example in FIG. 10-2)) to end the display of the prize display box image 271F003, and the over-winning is two times. When the prize display box image 271F003 in a second color (eg, blue) different from the first color is scattered (example in FIG. 10-1) or released (example in FIG. 10-2), the prize display box image 271F003 is displayed. The display mode before the end of the display of the winning display box image may be varied according to the number of over winnings, such as by performing an effect to end the display.

As an effect in which the display of the winning display box image differs depending on the number of over winnings, the winning display box image is displayed in a different color each time the number of over winnings in each round changes (every time it increases). 271F003 may be displayed and operated, the display may be terminated, and the winning display box image is displayed in a different color each time the number of over winnings in each round changes (for example, each time the number of over winnings increases multiple times, such as two times). After 271F003 is displayed and operated, the display may be ended.

In addition, as an effect in which the display of the prize display box image differs according to the number of over-wins, the above-described effect in which the end state of the prize display box image display differs according to the number of over-wins in each round. or the number of times over winning occurs in all rounds in the jackpot game state without executing the effect of changing the ending mode of the winning display box image display according to the number of over winnings in each round. (the number of over-winning prizes) is counted, and according to the total number of times, in the final round of the jackpot game state, the end mode of the winning display box image display is changed according to the total number of over-winning prizes in all rounds. You can direct to make it.

Specifically, for example, in the final round of the jackpot gaming state, when the total number of over winnings in all rounds is 1 to 5, the winning display box image 271F003 of the first color (for example, brown) is scattered (Fig. 10- 1) or released (example of FIG. 10-2)) to end the display of the winning display box image 271F003, and when over winning is 5 times or more, a second color different from the first color is used in the final round. In all rounds, the display of the prize display box image 271F003 (for example, blue) is scattered (example in FIG. 10-1) or emitted (example in FIG. 10-2) to end the display of the prize display box image 271F003. Depending on the total number of over winnings, the display mode before the end of the winning display box image display in the final round may be changed.

[Example of setting suggestion effect using prize display box image display]
Next, in the pachinko game machine 1 that can be set with different set values for the winning probabilities of the big win and the small win, for example, like the set values 1 to 3 described above, the winning display box image 271F003 described above is displayed. An example will be described in which it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect for suggesting to the player which setting value is set by using.

For example, an advantageous jackpot (for example, a 15R jackpot) and a disadvantageous jackpot (for example, a 5R jackpot) are provided, and a prize box image 271F003 is displayed in each round regardless of which jackpot, and there are a plurality of types of prize box images 271F003. There is a type, and control is executed to display the prize box image 271F003 of the type selected by lottery. In that case, the setting may be suggested by changing the selection ratio of the types of prize box images 271F003 displayed in each round of each big win. In particular, when the setting suggestion performance is executed at the time of a disadvantageous big win, the feeling of disappointment for being controlled to the disadvantageous big win can be alleviated by executing the setting suggestion performance.

Specifically, when there are white, red, and gold as the types of boxes in the winning box image 271F003, the more advantageous the set value is to the player, the higher the selection ratio of displaying the gold treasure box. may In this case, all the prize box images 271F003 may be displayed in the same color for each round, or each may be displayed in a different color (for example, the prize box images 271F003 in one round may be displayed in white. and red and gold colors may be mixed). When each round is displayed in a different color, for example, if there is a round that is displayed entirely in gold, it may be determined that the value is above a specific set value that is advantageous to the player.

Further, in the above embodiment, the lid of the winning box image 271F003 is opened each time the winning of the game ball into the special variable winning ball device 7 is detected. Each time the winning of the game ball to 7 is detected, a plurality of types of items (for example, character icons, symbols, etc.) may appear from the box and may not appear. When the lid is opened and an item appears, a setting suggestion capable of suggesting a setting value may be made to the player according to the type of the item that has appeared.

For example, if item A (first item) appears as an item type, it is highly likely that the setting will be advantageous to the player, or if item B (second item) An effect may be executed that is set to increase the ratio of set values (for example, odd number setting, even number setting, etc.).

In addition to suggesting the setting value, if the item C (third item) appears, it will be a big hit again in the pending storage information that exists after the end of this big win (so-called It is also possible to execute a suggestive effect suggesting that the Renso ratio will increase (reserved Renso suggestive effect). As a method of determining whether or not to make such an item appear, it may be determined at the start of the round, or may be determined at the start of the big win.

Also, the setting suggesting effect may be executed only when a disadvantageous big win (for example, 5R big win) and a disadvantageous big win occur, or only when an advantageous big win (for example, 15R big win) occurs. A suggestion effect may be executed.

[Modification of Characteristic Portion 271F]
[1] The image that can display the number of possible prizes in each round is not limited to the prize display box image 271F003 shown in FIGS. Other images may be used.

[2] As shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2, the winning notification effect of changing the display mode of the winning display box image 271F003 each time a winning game ball is detected in each round includes, for example, Any effect of changing the display mode may be performed, such as changing the prize display box image 271F003 from a color display image to a monochrome display image.

[3] As a first effect example of the winning number specific display as shown in FIG. is displayed for a predetermined period, all the winning display box images 271F003 are erased as they are, and when there is an over-winning, all the winning display box images 271F003 are enlarged and displayed on the spot to indicate that over-winning has occurred. As long as the display of the winning display box image 271F003 is ended in a different display mode depending on whether there is an over-winning or no over-winning, such as erasing after displaying, any effect may be used.

[4] As a second effect example of the winning number specific display as shown in FIG. After executing the effect of displaying for a predetermined period of time, the effect of erasing all the winning display box images 271F003 is executed, and when there is an over-winning, a banner image (an image showing a paper tape may be used) that celebrates the over-winning is specified. After executing the effect of displaying the winning display box image 271F003 for a period, the winning display box image 271F003 is displayed after different effects are executed depending on whether there is no over-winning or over-winning, such as executing the effect of erasing all the winning display box images 271F003. Any effect can be used as long as it ends the

[5] As an effect of displaying different prize display box images according to the types of jackpots shown in FIG. Any display mode may be used as long as the display mode differs according to the type of the big win, such as the display color of the winning display box image 271F003 depending on the type of the big win.

It should be noted that the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the scope of the claims.

1 Pachinko game machine 7 Special variable winning ball device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Effect control CPU 271F003 Winning display box image 271F002 Ball number image.

Claims (2)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
variable means capable of changing between a first state in which game media can enter and a second state in which game media cannot enter;
variable control means capable of executing a predetermined number of times a predetermined game for controlling the variable means from the second state to the first state in the advantageous state;
specific image display means capable of displaying a predetermined number of specific images for specifying the number of game media that can be entered from the time the variable means enters the first state to the time the second state is entered;
an obtainable number display means capable of displaying an obtainable number display capable of specifying the number of game media obtainable by entering the variable means in said advantageous state;
The specific image display means is
displaying the predetermined number of specific images when the variable means is in the first state, and maintaining display of the predetermined number of specific images until the variable means is in the second state;
When the predetermined number or less of game media enter the variable means, the display mode of one of the predetermined number of specific images already displayed each time a game medium enters is changed to the specific image. display by changing from to a specific mode in which a predetermined display accompanied by a predetermined action is displayed,
When the number of game media entering the variable means exceeds the predetermined number, all of the predetermined number of specific images changed to the specific mode are used to specify the specific image accompanied by a specific action. Execute a specific effect by activating the display, and then terminate the display of the predetermined number of specific images changed to the specific mode,
when the number of game media entering the variable means does not exceed the predetermined number, ending the display of the predetermined number of specific images changed to the specific mode without executing the specific effect;
The game machine, wherein the obtainable number display means does not change the obtainable number display when more than the predetermined number of game media enters the variable means. setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of types of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player;
setting suggestion effect means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect for suggesting setting of the setting value;
The setting suggestion effect means, when the number of game media entering the variable means exceeds the predetermined number after the variable means enters the first state until the variable means enters the second state, 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a setting suggestion effect can be executed.

Images